BMW 3 SERIES GRAN TURISMO Owner's Manual

Contents

A-Z

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate

Driving Machine®

THE BMW 3 SERIES

GRAN TURISMO.

OWNER'S MANUAL.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 960 574 - II/15

3 Series

Gran Turismo

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

Thank you for choosing a BMW.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.

Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your

BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or

Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle.

Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature.

We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.

BMW AG

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet: www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide


© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft

Munich, Germany

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English II/15, 03 15 490

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.


Addendum

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL

We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed

BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document.

1.

Where the terms “service center,” “the service center,” “your service center,” “service specialist,” or “service” are used in the

Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

2.

Where the text of the Owner's Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a

“service center” or “your service center,” we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

While BMW of North America LLC, at no cost to you, will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage periods, you are free to elect, both during those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops.

3.

Where the Owner's Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been approved by BMW, those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of

North America LLC. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do, we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.

4.

At page 7, under the warranty section's discussion of homologation, where it states that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there,” the text should read that you “may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there.”

5.

At page 7, under the “Parts and accessories” section, in the sixth sentence, the word “cannot” should read “does not.”

6.

At page 55, in the “Check and replace safety belts” section, the text beginning,

“This should only be done by your service center …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

“BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly.”

7.

At page 91, under the heading: “Special windshield,” the paragraph beginning,

“Therefore, have the special windshield …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends that you have the special windshield replaced by the service center.”

8.

At page 171 under the heading: “Objects within the range of movement of the pedals” and at page 229 under the heading:

“Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place.”

9.

At page 177, under the heading: “Have maintenance carried out,” the sentence beginning, “The maintenance should be carried out …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu


Addendum

thereof: “BMW recommends that you have the maintenance carried out by your service center.”

10.

At page 190, under the heading “Tire inflation specifications,” the sentence beginning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes …” should be disregarded.

11.

At page 196, under the heading: “Mounting,” the paragraph beginning, “Have mounting and balancing …” should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends that you have mounting and balancing performed by your service center or a tire mounting specialist.”

12.

At page 196, under the heading: “Approved wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, the term “Recommended” should be read in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non-recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle.

13.

At page 201, under the heading: “Snow

Chains,” the text should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe and are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center.

14.

At page 203, under the heading “Hood,” the sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar” should be disregarded.

15.

At page 206, under the heading: “Engine oil change,” the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:

BMW recommends that you have the oil changed at your BMW dealer's service center or at another service center that has trained personnel that can perform the work in accordance with BMW specifications.

16.

At page 208, under the heading: “Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian models,” the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with

BMW specifications. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle.

17.

At page 211 and page 214, where it reads:

“Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlights,” that text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: “Xenon headlight work or replacement can cause serious and fatal injuries.” In the text that follows, where it reads: “[h]ave any work on the xenon lighting system … ,” the following words should be read as preceding that passage: “It is strongly suggested that you …”

18.

At page 218, under the “Battery replacement” section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read:


Use of recommended vehicle batteries

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available.

After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any “check control” messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Addendum


Contents

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page

236

.

6 Notes

At a glance

14 Cockpit

18 iDrive

27 Voice activation system

30 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Controls

34 Opening and closing

51 Adjusting

61 Transporting children safely

65 Driving

77 Displays

92 Lights

97 Safety

119 Driving stability control systems

126 Driving comfort

147 Climate control

154 Interior equipment

163 Storage compartments

Driving tips

170 Things to remember when driving

173 Loading

176 Saving fuel

Mobility

186 Refueling

188 Fuel

190 Wheels and tires

202 Engine compartment

204 Engine oil

207 Coolant

208 Maintenance

210 Replacing components

221 Breakdown assistance

226 Care

Reference

232 Technical data

236 Everything from A to Z


Seite 6

Notes

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle.

User's manual for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication

The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ munication and the short commands of the voice activation system are described in a sep‐ arate user's manual, which is also included with the onboard literature.

Symbols

Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

◄ Marks the end of a specific item of information.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to select individual functions.

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components

Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly.

Additional sources of information

The service center will be happy to answer any other questions you may have.

Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.

BMW Driver’s Guide App

The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐ tries as an app. Additional information on the

Internet: www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series.

Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐ scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐ able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ lected optional features or the country-specific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐ mentary Owner's Handbooks.

6


Seite 7

Notes

On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently from what is shown in the illustrations.

Status of the Owner's

Manual

Basic information

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con‐ ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle.

For your own safety

Warranty

Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require‐ ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ ating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐ gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

Therefore, have this work performed only by a

BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ ately trained personnel.

If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and accessories

BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐ ries approved by BMW for this purpose.

Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐ ucts approved by BMW and related qualified advice.

BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles.

BMW can assume responsibility for them.

However, we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW.

BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply when country-specific government approval has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐ ating conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's own stringent quality standards.

California Proposition 65 Warning

California laws require us to state the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐ nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit

7


Seite 8

Notes

chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ lowing warranties:

▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ ranty.

▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.

▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ ited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con‐ ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de‐ liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements.

You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact

Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ ures:

▷ BMW Maintenance system

▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models

▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models

If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri‐ ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Data memory

Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ tion about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment:

▷ Operating mode of system components, fill levels for instance.

▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration.

▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.

▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ ing the stability control system.

▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.

This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ pair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, in‐

8


Seite 9

Notes

cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ nostic tools. You can obtain further information there if you need it. After an error is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis.

With the vehicle in use there are situations where you can associate these technical data with individuals if combined with other infor‐ mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert.

Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer - such as vehicle emergency locating - you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.

The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

▷ How various systems in your vehicle were operating.

▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened.

▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under‐ standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment.

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of

North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐

9


Seite 10

Notes

wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone

1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐ formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

10


Seite 11

Notes


11


At a glance

These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.


Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit

Cockpit


This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Active rear spoiler 121

2 Rear window safety switch

47

3 Power windows 47

4 Exterior mirror operation 58

5 Glove compartment on the driver's

side 163

Driver assistance systems

6 Lights

Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion

116

Intelligent Safety

106

Lane departure warning

114

14


Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance

Front fog lights

95

Parking lights

92

Low beams

92

Automatic headlight con‐ trol

93

Daytime running lights 93

Adaptive Light Control 93

High-beam Assistant 94

Instrument lighting 95

7 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 69

High beams, head‐ light flasher

69

High-beam Assistant

94

Roadside parking lights 93

On-board computer

86

8 Steering wheel buttons, left

Store speed

132 ,

126

Resume speed 132 ,

126

Cruise control on/off, inter‐

rupt 132

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

terrupting 126

Reduce distance

126

Increase distance

126

Cruise control rocker switch

132 ,

126

9 Instrument cluster 77

10 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation

27

Telephone, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and

Communication

Thumbwheel for selection lists 86

11 Steering column stalk, right

Wiper 70

12

Rain sensor

71

Clean the windshields and head‐ lights

71

Start/stop the engine and switch

the ignition on/off 66

Auto Start/Stop function 67

13 Horn, total area

14

Steering wheel heating

60

15 Adjust steering wheel 60

16 Open the tailgate 40

15


Seite 16

At a glance Cockpit

17 Unlock hood 203

All around the center console

1 Control Display

2 Ventilation

3

152

18

Hazard warning system

Central locking system

221

40

9

PDC Park Distance Control

134

Rearview camera 137

Parking assistant 142

Surround View

137

Side View 139

4 Glove compartment

163

5 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ nication

6 Climate control 147

7 Controller with buttons 18

8 Parking brake

68

10

Driving Dynamics Control

122

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol

119

11 Steptronic transmission selector

lever 72

16


Seite 17

All around the roofliner

Cockpit At a glance

1

2

3

Intelligent Emergency Re‐ quest

221

Panoramic glass sunroof

49

Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐ senger airbag

99

4

5

Reading lights 95

Interior lights 95


17

Seite 18

At a glance iDrive

iDrive



The concept

The iDrive combines the functions of many switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ ated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a trip

To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other traffic, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow it.◀

Control Display

Hints

▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions.

▷ Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.

▷ In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐ lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐ duced down to complete deactivation.

Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.

through shadow or climate control system, the normal functions are re-established.

Switching on

1.

Switch on the ignition.

2.

Press the controller.

Switch off

1.

Press button.

2.

"Turn off control display"

Control elements at a glance

Control elements

1 Control Display

2 Controller with buttons and, depending on the equipment version, with touchpad

Controller with navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.

Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller.

18


Seite 19

1.

Turn.

2.

Press.

3.

Move in four directions.

2.

Press.

iDrive At a glance

Press button Function

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.

1.

Turn.

Buttons on controller


MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA

NAV

TEL

Opens the Multimedia menu.

Opens the Navigation menu.

Opens the phone menu.

3.

Move in two directions.


19

Seite 20


Buttons on controller


MENU

Audio

TEL

BACK

Open the main menu.

Open audio menu last listened to, switch between audio me‐ nus.

Opens the phone menu.

Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1.

Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

Operating concept

Opening the main menu

Press button.

The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

2.


Menu items in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,

"Settings".

Changing between panels

After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.

▷ Move the controller to the left.

Closes current display and shows previous display.

Reopens previous display by pressing

BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.

▷ Move the controller to the right.

Opens new display on top of previous screen.

20


Seite 21


White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ cate that additional panels can be opened.

Display of an opened menu

When selecting a menu, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu.

To display the first panel of a menu:

▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed.

▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice.

Opening the Options menu

Press button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

2.

Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

3.


Activating/deactivating the functions

Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

Options menu

The "Options" menu consists of various areas:

▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".

This area remains unchanged.

▷ Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio".

▷ If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings

1.

Select a field.

Touchpad

Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller:

Selecting functions

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Touchpad"

3.

Select the desired function.

▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.

▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐ tive map.

▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.

▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered letters and numbers.

Entering letters and numbers

Entering letters requires some practice at the beginning. When entering, pay attention to the following:

21


Seite 22


▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters and numbers, it may be necessary to reel via the controller to the corresponding In‐

put mode, refer to page 25

, e.g. when the spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical.

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display.

▷ Always enter associated characters, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐ pends on the set language. Where neces‐ sary, enter special characters via the con‐ troller.

▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad.

▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in the center of the touchpad.

▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the upper area of the touchpad.

▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right in the lower area of the touchpad.

Using interactive map and Internet

Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the navigation system and Internet sites.

Function Controls

Move interactive map or

Internet sites.

Swipe into re‐ spective direc‐ tion.

Enlarge/shrink interactive map or Internet sites.

Drag in or out on the touchpad with fingers.

Display the menu or open a link in the Internet.

Tap once.

Changing settings

You may change control display settings via touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.

Example: setting the clock

Setting the clock

On the Control Display:

1.

Press button. The main menu is dis‐ played.

2.

Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller.

3.

If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".

4.

Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

5.

Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller.

22


Seite 23


6.

Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

7.

Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information

Status field

The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right:

▷ Time.

▷ Current entertainment source.

▷ Sound output, on/off.

▷ Wireless network reception strength.

▷ Phone status.

▷ Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbols

The symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being received.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network reception strength.

Symbol flashes: network search.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Symbol Meaning

Text message was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player.

Music collection.

Gracenote® database.

AUX-IN port.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are turned off.

Split screen

General information

Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the on-board comupter.

In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

23


Seite 24


Switching the split screen on and off


1.

Press button.

2.

"Split screen"

Selecting the display


1.

Press button.

2.

"Split screen"

3.

Move the controller until the split screen is selected.

4.

Press the controller or select "Split screen content".

5.

Select the desired menu item.

Without navigation system and telephone

Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐ tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment, Communication.

Saving a function

1.

Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2.

Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds.

Running a function

Press button.

The function will work immediately.

This means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment

Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The key assignment is displayed at top edge of screen.

Programmable memory buttons


The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ tions, phone numbers and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

Deleting the button assignments

1.

Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx. five seconds.

2.

"OK"

24


Seite 25


Deleting personal in the vehicle

The concept

Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves personal data, such as stored radio stations.

These personal data can be permanently de‐ leted through iDrive.


Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing data can be deleted:

▷ Personal Profile settings.

▷ Stored radio stations.

▷ Stored Favorites buttons.

▷ Travel and computer information.

▷ Music collection.

▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations.

▷ Phone book.

▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies.

▷ Voice notes.

▷ Login accounts.

▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 30 minutes.

Functional requirement

Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data

Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐ trol Display.

1.


2.

"Settings"

3.

Open "Options".

4.

"Delete personal data"

5.

"Continue"

6.

"OK"

Entering letters and numbers



1.

Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ bers.

2.

Select additional letters or numbers if needed.

3.

"OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the let‐ ter or number.

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Switching between cases, letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can reel between entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Tip controller up.

Without navigation system

Select the symbol.

Entry comparison

Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐ rowed down with every letter entered and let‐ ters may be added automatically.

Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle.

▷ Only those letters are offered during input for which data is available.

25


Seite 26


▷ Target search: names of locations may be entered in languages available through

Control Display.

26


Seite 27

Voice activation system At a glance

Voice activation system



The concept

▷ Most functions displayed on the Control

Display can be operated by voice com‐ mands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input.

▷ Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the voice activation system.

▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.

▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's

Manual to use with the voice activation system.

Requirements

Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ fied.

Set the language, refer to page 89

.

Using voice activation

Activating the voice activation system

1.

wheel.

Press button on the steering

2.

Wait for the signal.

3.

Say the command.

A command that is recognized by the voice activation system is announced and dis‐ played in the instrument cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ cates that the voice activation system is active.

If no other commands are available, use func‐ tion via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steer‐ ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.

Possible commands

Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands.

The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ play.

There are short commands for many functions.

You may select lists such as phone lists via voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐ actly as they show in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloud

You can have available commands read out loud for you: ›Voice commands‹

E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud.

27


Seite 28

At a glance Voice activation system

Executing functions using short commands

Execute functions on the main menu via short commands. It almost doesn't matter which menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.

List of short commands for the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ munication Owner's Manual.

Help dialog for the voice activation system

Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹

Additional commands for the help dialog:

▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ tion about the current operating options and the most important commands for them.

▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.

2.

wheel.


3.

›Tone‹

Setting the voice dialog

Set system to standard dialog or use a short version.

The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Language/Units"

3.

"Speech type:"

4.

Select setting.

One example: open the tone settings

Via the main menu

The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller.

1.

Turn on the Entertainment sound output if needed.

2.

wheel.


3.

›Radio‹

4.

›Tone‹

Via short command

The desired tone settings can also be started via a short command.

1.

Turn on the Entertainment sound output if needed.

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button while giving an in‐ struction until the desired volume is set.

▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use.

Hints on Emergency

Requests

Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.

28


Seite 29

This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page

221

, close to the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions

▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed.

▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐ roof closed to prevent noise interference.

▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Voice activation system At a glance


29

Seite 30

At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle



Select components

1.

Press button.

2.

Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".

3.


4.

Selecting desired range:

▷ "Quick reference"

▷ "Search by pictures"

▷ "Owner's Manual"

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. It specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle.

Components of the Integrated

Owner's Manual

The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ mation or possible access.

Quick Reference Guide

The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐ tion how to operate the car, how to use basic vehicle functions or what to do in case of a breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ played while driving.

Search by images

Image search provides information and de‐ scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ ogy for a feature is not at hand.

Owner's Manual

Search for information and descriptions by en‐ tering terms selected from the index.

Leafing through the Owner's Manual

Page by page with link access

Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed.

Page by page without link access

Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐ ping the links.

Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to browse from page to page.

Scroll back.

Scroll forward.

30


Seite 31

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function

You may open the relevant information di‐ rectly.

Opening via the iDrive

To move directly from the application on the

Control Display to the Options menu:

1.

Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

2.

"Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed

Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display:


Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual

To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the

Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:

1.

Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

2.


3.

Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4.

Press button again to return to last displayed function.

5.

Press button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To alternate permanently between the last dis‐ played function and the Owner's Manual re‐ peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

Programmable memory buttons


The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly.

Storing

1.

"Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.

2.

Press selected button for more than 2 seconds.

Executing

Press button.

The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ mediately.

31



Controls

This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.


Seite 34

Controls Opening and closing

Opening and closing



Overview

Remote control/key


The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with integrated key.

Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐ tery.

You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country-specific ver‐ sion. For Settings, refer to page

45

.

The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Personal Profile, refer to

page 35 .

The remote controls hold information on re‐ quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐

mote control, refer to page 208

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Open the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Integrated key

Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐ row 2.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

▷ Driver's door.

▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side.

34


Seite 35

Opening and closing Controls

Replacing the battery

▷ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo‐ bile devices in the vehicle.

A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐ tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.

Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control

1.

Remove integrated key from remote con‐ trol.

2.

Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.

3.

Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2.

4.

Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up.

5.

Press the cover closed.

Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.

New remote controls

New remote controls are available from the service center.

Loss of the remote controls

Lost remote controls can be disabled by your service center.

Emergency detection of remote control

It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following:

▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ mote control by external sources e.g., by radio masts.

▷ Empty battery in remote control.

▷ Interference from radio transmissions through mobile devices in close proximity to remote control.

Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding

Check Control message appears, hold the re‐ mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the

Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake.

If the remote control is not recognized: slightly change the height position of the remote con‐ trol and repeat the procedure.

Personal Profile

The concept

Personal Profile provides three profiles, using which personal vehicle settings can be stored.

Every remote control has one of these profiles assigned.

If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐ vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐ tomatically applied.

If several drivers use their own remote control, the vehicle will adjust the personal settings during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ stored, if the vehicle has been used in the

35


Seite 36


meantime by a person with a different remote control.

Changes to the settings are automatically saved in the personal profile.

Three personal profiles and a guest profile can be created.

Adjusting

The settings for the following systems and functions are saved in the active profile. The scope of storable settings is country- and equipment-dependable.

▷ Unlocking and locking.

▷ Lights.

▷ Climate control.

▷ Radio.

▷ Instrument cluster.

▷ Programmable memory buttons.

▷ Volumes, tone.

▷ Control Display.

▷ Navigation.

▷ Park Distance Control PDC.

▷ Rearview camera

▷ Side View.

▷ Head-up Display.

▷ Driving Dynamics Control.

▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ tion, steering wheel position.

▷ Cruise control.

▷ Intelligent Safety.

▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.

Profile management

Opening profiles

Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐ ferent profile may be activated.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Profiles"

3.

Select a profile.

▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile are automatically applied.

▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ mote control being used at the time.

▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐ ent remote control, this profile will apply to both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐ tiated anymore between the settings for the two remote controls.

Renaming profiles

A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ file to avoid confusion between the profiles.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Profiles"

3.

"Options"

4.

"Rename current profile"

Resetting profiles

The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Profiles"

3.

"Options"

4.

"Reset current profile"

Exporting profiles

Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐ ported.

This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐ other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ file function.

The following export options are available:

▷ Via BMW Online.

▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.

Popular file systems for USB devices are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐

36


Seite 37


ommended formats for profile export.

Other formats may not support the export.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Profiles"

3.

"Export profile"

4.

BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface: "USB device"

Importing profiles

Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be imported via BMW Online.

Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ ported via the USB interface.

Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ ported profile.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Profiles"

3.

"Import profile"

4.

BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface: "USB device"

Using the guest profile

The guest profile is for individual settings that are saved in none of the three personal pro‐ files.

This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Profiles"

3.

"Guest"

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the current remote control.

Display profile list during start

The profile list can be displayed during each start to select the desired profile.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Profiles"

3.

"Options"

4.

"Display user list at startup"

Using the remote control

Note

Take the remote control with you

People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.◀

Unlocking

Press button on the remote control.

▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are being unlocked.

▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐ vated. This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually.

▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this function was activated.

▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.

For Settings, refer to page

45

.

The alarm system, refer to page

46 , is dis‐

armed.

Convenient opening

Press and hold this button on the re‐ mote control after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the remote control is pressed.

37


Seite 38


Locking

Locking from the outside

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.◀

The driver's door must be closed.

Press button on the remote control.

All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are being locked.

The alarm system, refer to page 46

, is armed.

Switching on interior lights and courtesy lights

Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off manually.

If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐ tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-

theft warning system, refer to page 47

, are turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐ fore pressing the button again.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

To reel off the alarm: press any button.

Opening the tailgate

Note the opening height of the tailgate

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.◀

Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

The closed tailgate is automatically opened, whether or not the vehicle is locked or un‐ locked.

Depending on the features and the country version, it is also possible to have door un‐ locked. Create the settings, refer to page

45 .

If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is locked again as soon as it closes.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.◀

Provide edge protection

Sharp objects or those with edges can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heat conductors of the rear window. Pro‐ vide edge protection.◀

Malfunction

Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ lowing circumstances:

▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replace the battery, refer to page

35

.

▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power.

▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects.

▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity.

Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices.

38


Seite 39


In the case of interference, the vehicle can also be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐

out remote control, refer to page 39 .

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication

Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following:

FCC ID:

▷ LX8766S.

▷ LX8766E.

▷ LX8CAS.

▷ LX8CAS2.

▷ MYTCAS4.

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and

▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Remove the key before pulling the door handle

Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.◀

Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door lock using the integrated key, refer to page

34 .

The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system

The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the door lock.

In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ tion, if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control, refer to page

35

.

Without remote control

From the outside

Locking from the outside

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.◀


39

Seite 40


From the inside

Unlocking and locking

Pressing the central locking system button locks or unlocks the vehicle with the front doors closed.

The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Unlocking and opening

Tailgate

Automatic tailgate operation

Adjusting the opening height

You can set how far the tailgate should open.

Adjusting the opening height

When adjusting the opening height, en‐ sure that there is a clearance of at least

4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling may not be high enough for the open tailgate if the loading situation changes.◀

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Tailgate"

3.

Turn the controller until the desired open‐ ing height is selected.

Opening


The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.

Adjust the opening height of the tailgate ac‐ cording to the given situation.◀

▷ Press the central locking system button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest.

▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door handle twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.

▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior

▷ Press button on the remote con‐ trol for approx. 1 second.

As the case may be, the doors are also un‐ locked. Opening with the remote control, refer to page

38 .

40


Seite 41


▷ Push the button in the driver's footwell.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted opening height.

The opening procedure is interrupted:

▷ By pressing a button again.

▷ When starting the engine.

▷ When the vehicle starts moving.

▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate.

Closing

Keep the closing path clear

Make sure that the closing path of the tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ sult.◀

Monitor closing

Monitor closing to ensure that no one becomes trapped.◀



Provide edge protection

Sharp objects or those with edges can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heat conductors of the rear window. Pro‐ vide edge protection.◀

The floor panel in the trunk must be closed, otherwise the tailgate cannot be closed.

Without Comfort Access:

▷ Press button on the inside of the tailgate.

With Comfort Access:

▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the tailgate.

Pressing the button again stops the mo‐ tion.

▷ Press button, arrow 2.

The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the remote control must be outside of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate.


▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior


41

Seite 42



An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate closes.

The closing operation is interrupted:

▷ When starting the engine.

▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.

Manual operation

Do not operate the tailgate manually if it is blocked

If the tailgate is blocked, do not operate it man‐ ually as the tailgate may otherwise become damaged and injury may result.

Contact your service center.◀

In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐ ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and smooth motion.

Locking separately

The tailgate can be locked separately, using the switch in the front center armrest.

▷ The tailgate is locked, ar‐ row 1.

The small and large tailgates are locked.

▷ The tailgate is unlocked, ar‐ row 2.

Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the tailgate and disconnects it from the central locking system.

When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate cannot be accessed. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service. The infrared remote control can be handed out without the key.

Emergency unlocking

Pull the handle inside the trunk.

The tailgate is unlocked.

Comfort Access

The concept

The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ ing the remote control.

All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.

The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions:

▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.

▷ Convenient closing.

▷ Opening the tailgate individually

▷ Open tailgate with no-touch activation.

▷ Start the engine.

Functional requirements

▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ ence nearby.

▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle.

▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ mote control is in the vehicle.

42


Seite 43

Unlocking


Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow.

This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control.

Locking

Touch the surface on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐ ing the door handle.


To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐ cle.

Convenient closing

Monitor closing

Monitor closing to ensure that no one becomes trapped.◀

Touch the surface on the door handle of the driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with your finger and hold it there without grasping the door handle.

This corresponds to pressing and holding the remote control button.

In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors fold in.

Unlocking the tailgate separately

Press button on tailgate's exterior


The situation of the doors does not change.


The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result.◀



Opening and closing the tailgate with no-touch activation

The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-touch activation using the remote control you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for‐ ward-directed foot motion in the center of the

43


Seite 44


area at the rear of the car and the trunk lid opens and/or closes.

Foot movement to be carried out

Do not touch vehicle

With the foot motion, make sure there is steady stance and do not touch the vehicle; otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from hot exhaust system parts.◀

1.

Place in the center behind the vehicle, about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.

2.

Move a foot in the direction of travel as far under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐ ately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors.

Opening

Perform the foot movement described earlier.

The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked.

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening.

Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐ tem flashes.

Preventing inadvertent opening

In situations where the tailgate should not be opened with no-touch activation, en‐ sure that the remote control is located beyond the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear of the car.

Otherwise, the tailgate may be opened inad‐ vertently, for example by an unintentional or misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀

Closing

Perform the foot movement described earlier.

The hazard warning system flashes on and an acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate closes.

When closing, the tailgate pivots back and down.

The closing of the tailgate has no effect on the locking of the vehicle.

Another foot movement can interrupt the clos‐ ing operation.

Avoiding unintentional closing

In situations in which the opened tailgate should not to be closed with no-touch activa‐ tion, ensure that the remote control is located beyond the range of the sensor, at least

5 ft/1.50 m from the rear of the car.

Otherwise, the tailgate may be closed inadver‐ tently, for example by an unintentional or mis‐ interpreted movement of the foot.◀


Make sure that the closing path of the tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ sult.◀



Malfunction

Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ lowing circumstances:

44


Seite 45


▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replace the battery, refer to page

35 .

▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power.

▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects.

▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity.

Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page

39 .

Adjusting

Unlocking

The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ fer to page

35

.

Doors

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Doors/key"

3.

Select the symbol.

4.

Select the desired function:

▷ "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ locks the entire vehicle.

▷ "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate

Depending on optional features and country version, this setting is not offered in some cases.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Doors/key"

3.

Select the symbol.

4.


▷ "Tailgate"

The tailgate is opened.

▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"

The tailgate is opened and the doors unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐

fer to page 35 .

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Doors/key"

3.

Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ mation signals.

▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"

▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"

Automatic locking

The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐

fer to page 35 .

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Doors/key"

3.


▷ "Lock if no door is opened"

The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened.

▷ "Lock after start driving"

The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

45


Seite 46


Retrieving the seat and mirror settings

The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions used last are stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use.

When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seat

If this function is used, first make sure that the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀

The adjustment procedure is interrupted:

▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.

▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐ ory is pressed.

Activating the setting

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Doors/key"

3.

"Last seat position autom."

Arming and disarming the alarm system

When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock.

Tailgate and armed alarm system

The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is armed.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again when the doors are locked.

The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

Alarm system

The concept

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system responds to:

▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.

▷ Movements in the interior.

▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the car.

▷ Disconnected battery voltage.

The alarm system briefly signals tampering:

▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.

▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ tem.

▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The system is armed.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:

46


Seite 47


The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ cured.

After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.

When the still open access is closed, inte‐ rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ ing:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm

▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, re‐

fer to page 35 .

▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the remote control on your person, grasp the driver side or front passenger side door handle completely.

Power windows

Hint


Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not operate the power windows and injure themselves.◀

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations:

▷ In automatic car washes.

▷ In duplex garages.

▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ cles, at sea or on a trailer.

▷ With animals in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.

Opening

▷ Press the button to the resistance point.

The window opens while the switch is held.

▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point.

47


Seite 48


The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stopse the motion.

See also: Convenient opening, refer to

page 37 , via remote control.

Closing


Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.

The window closes while the switch is held.

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically. Pulling again stops the motion.

See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,

refer to page 42

.

Pinch protection system

Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

No window accessories

Do not install any accessories in the win‐ dow's range of movement; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀

If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a window closes, closing is interrupted.

The window reopens slightly.

Closing without the pinch protection system


Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐ vent window from closing properly - proceed as follows:

1.

Pull the reel past the resistance point and hold it there.

The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin.

2.

Pull the reel past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protection.

Safety switch


The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, e.g., from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear.

Switching on and off

Press button.

The LED lights up if the safety func‐ tion is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operation

Press the safety switch when transport‐ ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without super‐ vision.◀

48


Seite 49


Panoramic glass sunroof


The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately, using the same switch.

The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐ tion is switched on.


Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ erwise, injuries may result.◀


Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐ selves.◀

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor separately

▷ Press the reel in the desired direction to the resistance point and hold it there.

The sliding visor opens, as long as the reel is held down. If the sliding visor is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens.

The glass sunroof closes as long as the reel is held down. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sliding visor closes.

▷ Press the reel in the desired direction past the resistance point.

The sliding visor opens automatically. If the sliding visor is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens automatically.

The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐ tomatically.

Pressing the reel upward stops the motion.

Tilting the glass sunroof

Push switch briefly upward.

▷ The closed glass sunroof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly.

▷ The opened glass sunroof closes until it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor does not move.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together

Briefly press the reel twice in succession in the desired direc‐ tion past the resistance point.

The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐ sor move together. Pressing the reel upward stops the motion.

▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer to

page 37

, via remote control.

▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐

cess, refer to page 42 .

49


Seite 50


Comfort position

If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐ pletely opened, the comfort position has been attained. In this position the wind noises in the interior are the least.

If desired, continue the movement by pressing the reel.

Pinch protection system

If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing.

The glass sunroof reopens slightly.

Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐ rupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.◀

Closing from the open position without pinch protection

E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

1.

Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐ ance point and hold.

The pinch protection is limited and the glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin.

2.

Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐ sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐ roof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Closing from the raised position without pinch protection

If there is an external danger, push the reel for‐ ward past the resistance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐ tion.

Initializing after a power failure

After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent.

Initializing the system

The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.

During the initialization, the glass sunroof closes without jam protection.


Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐ erwise, injuries may result.◀

Press the reel up and hold it until the initialization is complete:

▷ Initialization begins within

15 seconds and is com‐ pleted when the glass sun‐ roof and sliding visor are completely closed.

▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐ tection.

50


Seite 51

Adjusting Controls

Adjusting



Keep the movement area unobstructed

When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.◀

Manually adjustable seats

At a glance

Sitting safely

The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with:

▷ Safety belts, refer to page

54

.

▷ Head restraints, refer to page

55 .

▷

Airbags, refer to page 97 .

Seats

Hints

Do not adjust the seat while driving

Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐ ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally pro‐ vided by the belt.◀

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Seat tilt

4 Backrest width

5 Lumbar support

6 Height

7 Backrest tilt

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

51


Seite 52

Controls Adjusting

After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ ward or back slightly making sure it engages properly.

Height

to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat engages properly.

Electrically adjustable seats

At a glance

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest tilt

1 Seat and mirror memory

2 Backrest width

3 Lumbar support

4 Backrest tilt

5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Seat tilt


The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐ cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐ sition is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer to page

46 , is activated for this purpose.

Adjustments in detail

1.

Forward/back.

Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight

52


Seite 53

2.

Height.

3.

Seat tilt.

4.

Backrest tilt.


Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐ gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch.

The curvature is increased/ decreased.

▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐ tion of the switch.

The curvature is shifted up/ down.

Backrest width

Change the width of the back‐ rest using the side wings to ad‐ just the lateral support.


53

Seite 54


Front seat heating

If the journey is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ ically with the temperature selected last.

When ECO PRO, refer to page 177

, is acti‐ vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch off

Press button longer.

The LEDs go out.

Switching on

Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the journey is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ ically with the temperature selected last.

When ECO PRO, refer to page

177 , is acti‐

vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch off

Press button longer.

The LEDs go out.

Rear seat heating

Switching on

Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

54

Safety belts

Seats with safety belt

The vehicle has five seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.


Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off.

For the occupants' safety the belt locking mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it.

Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

▷ The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐ sengers sitting on the left and right.

▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely intended for the center passenger.

Hints

One person per safety belt

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀


Seite 55


Putting on the belt

Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐ jure the abdomen.

The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable objects, or be pinched.◀

What reduces the restraining effect

Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the restraining effect is reduced.◀

Using the middle safety belt

If the middle safety belt in the rear is used, the larger side of the backrest must be locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have a restraining effect.◀

Buckling the belt

Safety belt reminder for driver's and passenger's seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ nal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Damage to safety belts

Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐ aged otherwise:

Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

Check and replace safety belts

This should only be done by your service center; otherwise, this safety feature might not work properly.◀

Front headrests

Correctly adjusted head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint

Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.◀

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt

1.

Hold the belt firmly.

2.

Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3.

Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐ nism.

Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Distance

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.

55


Seite 56


Adjusting the height

▷ To raise: push.

▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push headrest down.

Tilt

Three different tilt positions are available.

1.

Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ sistance.

2.

Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐ straint out completely.

Before transporting passengers

Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀

▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐ straint forward, arrow 1.

▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head restraint folds as far back as possible.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Rear head restraints

Folding down head restraints

Extending/retracting head restraint

Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐ sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted headrests again if passengers are being car‐ ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀

56

▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.

▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.


Seite 57


Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Fold the seat down, refer to page 161

, before removing the head restraint, otherwise the head restraint cannot be removed.

The concept

Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored per profile, refer to page

35

, and called up. Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.

At a glance

1.

Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ sistance.

2.

Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐ straint out completely.

Before transporting passengers

Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀

Storing

1.


2.

Set the desired position.

3.

Press button. The LED in the but‐ ton lights up.

4.

Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out.

If the SET button is pressed accidentally:

Press button again.

The LED goes out.

Seat and mirror memory

Hints

Do not retrieve the memory while driving

Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat could result in an accident.◀


When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.◀

Calling up settings

Comfort function

1.

Open the driver's door.

2.

Switch off the ignition.

3.

Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.

The corresponding seat position is performed automatically.

The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

57


Seite 58


Safety mode

1.

Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐ tion.

2.

Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is com‐ pleted.

Calling up of a seat position deactivated

After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐ tions is deactivated to save battery power.

To reactivate calling up of a seat position:

▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid.

▷ Press a button on the remote control.

▷ Press the Start/Stop button.

At a glance

1 Adjusting

58

2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor

3 Fold in and out 59

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors


The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐ ror setting is stored for the profile currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ mote control, the position is automatically re‐ trieved if this function is active.

Note

Estimating distances correctly

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.◀

Adjusting electrically

The setting corresponds to the direc‐ tion in which the button is pressed.

Saving positions

Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 57

.

Adjusting manually

In case of electrical malfunction press edges of mirror.

Automatic Curb Monitor

The concept

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward.

This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.

Activating

1.

Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.

58


Seite 59


2.

Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position.

Fold in and out

Press button.

Possible at speeds up to approx.

15 mph/20 km/h.

E. g. this is advantageous

▷ In car washes.

▷ In narrow streets.

▷ For folding mirrors back out that were folded away manually.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx.

25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash

Before washing the car in an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.◀

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature

Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ med. Photocells are used to control the Interior

rearview mirror, refer to page 59 .

Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature

The concept

Photocells are used for control:

▷ In the mirror glass.

▷ On the back of the mirror.


For proper operation:

▷ Keep the photocells clean.

▷ Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield.

59


Seite 60


Steering wheel

Note

Do not adjust while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.◀

Adjusting

1.

Fold the lever down.

2.

Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion.

3.

Fold the lever back.

Steering wheel heating

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.

60


Seite 61

Transporting children safely Controls

Transporting children safely



The right place for children

Note

Children in the vehicle

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.◀

Children should always be in the rear

Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rear

Only transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight and size.◀

Children on the front passenger seat

Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ straint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐

ger airbags, refer to page 99 .

Note

Deactivating the front-seat passenger airbags

If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀

Installing child restraint systems

Hints

Manufacturer's information for child re‐ straint systems

To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐ tems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐ tive effect can be lost.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seat

When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because

61


Seite 62

Controls Transporting children safely

of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ rest.◀

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Deactivating the front-seat passenger airbags

If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀

After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page

99 .

Seat position and height

Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ ble and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐ dent.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐ cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐ til the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Backrest width

Backrest width for the child seat

Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, the backrest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stabil‐ ity of the child seat will be reduced.◀

Adjustable backrest width: before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ ten child restraint systems.

The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐ nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt

1.

Pull out the strap completely.

2.

Secure the child restraint system with the belt.

3.

Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt

1.

Unbuckle the belt buckle.

2.

Remove the child restraint system.

3.

Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.

62


Seite 63

Transporting children safely Controls

LATCH child restraint system

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ dren.

Note

Follow manufacturer's information for

LATCH child restraint systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint systems, observe the operating and safety in‐ formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐ erwise, the level of protection may be re‐ duced.◀

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach the

CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Note

Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐ chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐ duced.◀

Before installing LATCH child restraint systems

Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐ straint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems

1.

Mount the child restraint system; refer to the user's manual of the system.

2.

Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap

Mounting points

The respective symbol shows the an‐ chor for the upper retaining strap.

Seats with an upper Top Tether are marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Note

Mounting eyelets

Use the mounting eyes only for the up‐ per retaining strap to secure child restraint systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.◀

Position

The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐ bols. It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer

LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat belt instead for the middle seat.

Retaining strap guide

Retaining strap

Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not passed over the head restraints or sharp edges and is not twisted up to the upper mounting points; otherwise, the belt cannot properly secure the child restraint system in an accident.◀

63


Seite 64

Controls Transporting children safely

Locking the doors and windows

Rear doors

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Mounting point/eye

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point

1.

Raise the head restraint if needed.

2.

Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint.

3.

If there is a retaining strap, run it between the backrest and the cargo cover.

4.

Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye.

5.

Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

6.

Lower and lock head restraints as needed.

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear

Press button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the rear.

This locks various functions so that they can‐ not be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page

48 .

64


Seite 65

Driving Controls

Driving



Start/Stop button

The concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: The engine starts if the brakes are stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐ ton.

Ignition on

Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop button without stepping on the brake.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator and warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition off

Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

P when the ignition is switched off

P is engaged automatically when the ig‐ nition is switched off. When in an automatic car wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀

The ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:

▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the low beams are activated.

▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are turned off.

▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are turned off.

▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off.

The low beams switch to parking lights after approx. 15 minutes of no use.

Radio ready state

Activate radio-ready state:

▷ When the engine is running: press the

Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation.

The radio-ready state switches off automati‐ cally:

▷ After approx. 8 minutes.

▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ tral locking system.

▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.

65


Seite 66

Controls Driving

The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons:

▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.

▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

▷ When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights.

If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, the daytime running lights are activated.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine

1.

Depress the brake pedal.

2.

Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ gine starts.


Hints

Enclosed areas

Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

Unattended vehicle

Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger.

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐ vent the vehicle from moving.◀

Repeated starting in quick succession

Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐ edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.◀

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds.

Engine stop

Hints


Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not start the engine.◀

Apply parking brake and further secure the vehicle if needed.

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.◀

Before driving into a car wash

So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ serve instructions for going into an automatic

car wash, refer to page 226

.


Switching off the engine

1.

Engage selector lever position P with the vehicle stopped.

2.


The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

3.

Set the parking brake.

66


Seite 67


Auto Start/Stop function

The concept

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.

The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off.

Automatic mode

After every start of the engine using the Start/

Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in the last selected state, refer to page

68

.

When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is available when the vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stop

The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ ing a stop under the following conditions:

Steptronic transmission:

▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ tion D.

▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped.

▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The READY display in the tach‐ ometer signals that the Auto

Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically.

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been met.

Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:

▷ External temperature too low.

▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ matic climate control is running.

▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.

▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ ature.

▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.

▷ After driving in reverse.

▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on.

▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.

▷ At higher elevations.

▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.

▷ The parking assistant is activated.

▷ Stop-and-go traffic.

▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or

R.

▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.


The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ lowing conditions:

▷ Steptronic transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met.

▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.

▷ The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time.

67


Seite 68


The engine can only be started via the Start/

Stop button.


Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ lowing situations:

▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when the cooling function is switched on.

▷ The steering wheel is turned.

▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.

▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on.

▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.

▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on.

Activating/deactivating the system manually

Using the button

▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e. g., when leaving it.

1.

Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ matically.

2.

Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons as if the driver were absent.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check

Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked.

Press button.

▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

The engine is started during an automatic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

Parking brake

Applying

The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

68


Seite 69

Releasing


Using turn signals

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.

Hints

Use while driving

On rare occasions if it is necessary to use the parking brake while driving, do not use ex‐ cessive force when applying it. When using it, keep the button on the lever depressed.

Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐ ing the parking brake may cause the rear wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐ tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.

The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set.

Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher

Turn signal

Hints

Do not adjust the exterior mirrors

Do not adjust the exterior mirror while driving and when turn signals/hazard warning flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐ nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐ tion and can't be seen.◀

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activation

Press the lever to the resistance point.

The turn signal flashes three times.

The function can be activated or deactivated.


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Lighting"

3.

"Triple turn signal"


Signaling briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

69


Seite 70


High beams, headlight flasher Switching on

▷ High beams, arrow 1.

▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Hints

Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐ shield

Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀

Do not activate wipers on dry windshield

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.◀

Do not activate wipers with wipers folded away

Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be damaged.◀

Push wiper lever up.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released.

▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.

▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point.

Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐ hicle comes to standstill.

Switch off and brief wipe

Push wiper lever down.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released.

▷ Single wipe: press down once.

▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.

▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

70


Seite 71


Interval mode or rain sensor

The concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ ror.

Activating/deactivating

Clean the windshield, headlights

Press button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.

When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐ intentional wiping can cause damages.◀

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

Pull the wiper lever towards you.

The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐ lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐ vated.

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures

Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze onto the windshield which might impede your viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid.

Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; operation might damage pump.◀

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipers

Fold wipers back when you want to change the blades or with pending low temperatures.

1.

Switch the ignition on and off again.

2.

With icy conditions make sure that blades are not frozen to the windshield.

3.

Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

71


Seite 72


Folding wipers back down

Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; other‐ wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are activated.◀

1.


2.

Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Washer fluid reservoir

Washer fluid

Hints

Antifreeze for washer fluid

Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injury if it is used incorrectly.

Therefore, keep it away from possible sources of ignition.

Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children.

Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ tainer.

United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ centrate or the equivalent.◀

Adding washer fluid

Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts.

Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ ervoir.

Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ centrate and tap water and – if required – with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ turer's recommendations.

Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the right mixture.

Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system.

Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ ferent manufacturers because they can clog the windshield washer nozzles.

Recommended minimum fill quantity:

0.2 US gal/1 liter.


Selector lever positions

D Drive

Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ ation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

R is Reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral:

The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car washes, e.g.

72


Seite 73


When the ignition is switched off, refer to page

65 , selector lever position P is engaged

automatically.

P Park

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked.

P is engaged automatically:

▷ After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to page

65 , or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 65

, and when selector lever position R or D is set.

▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐ tion N is set.

▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D or

R is set.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐ lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐ hicle may begin to move.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Engaging selector lever positions

Press on the brake pedal until you start driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀

▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector lever position P until the engine is running and the brake is applied.

▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.

After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

Press unlock button, in order to:

▷ Engage R.

▷ Shift out of P.

Engaging P

Press button P.

73


Seite 74


Sport program and manual mode

Activating the sport program

Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ tor lever position D.

The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ vated.

Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode

The Steptronic Sport transmission does not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode once the maximum speed is reached, if one of the following conditions is met:

▷ DSC deactivated.

▷ TRACTION activated.

▷ SPORT+ activated.

In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.

With the respective transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐ taneously operating the kickdown and the left shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐ duced via the shift paddles when switching briefly from D to manual mode.

Ending the sport program/manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles

Activating the M/S manual mode

1.

Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D.

2.

Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward.

Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, e.g., M1.

Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

Switching to manual mode

▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward.

▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ wards.

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐ lected gear.

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.

▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.

▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.

▷ With the respective transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.

74


Seite 75


Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode.

If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐ sition D with the respective transmission ver‐ sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐ matic mode:

▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.

Or

▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.

In the manual mode, after conservative driving for a certain amount of time or if there has been no acceleration or shifting of the shift paddles within a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.


The selector lever position is dis‐ played, e.g.: P.

Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock


Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from the danger area.

Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin the engine.

Engaging selector lever position N

1.


2.

Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start.

3.

Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐ tion N.

A corresponding Check Control message is displayed.

4.

Press the selector lever again into posi‐ tion N within approx. 6 seconds.

Position N is displayed in the instrument cluster.

5.

Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.

6.

Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own.

Steptronic Sport transmission:

Launch Control

The concept

Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction.

Hints

Component wear

Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, this may result in premature wear of components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.◀

Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page

170 , period.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

Requirements

Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km.

75


Seite 76


To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel.

Start with launch control

While the engine is running:

1.

Press button or select Sport+ with the Driving Dynamics Control.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.

2.

Engage selector lever position S.

3.

With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.

4.

Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster.

5.

The starting engine speed adjusts. Within

3 seconds, release the brake.

Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐ mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.

Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used again.

76


Seite 77

Displays Controls

Displays



Overview, instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge

81

2 Speedometer

3 Messages, e.g. Check Control

4 Tachometer 81

5 Engine oil temperature

81

6 Current fuel consumption

7 Electronic displays

77

8 Reset miles

82

Electronic displays

▷

Selection lists, refer to page 86

.

▷ External temperature, refer to page

82

.

▷

Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 67

.

▷ On-board computer, refer to page

86 .

▷ Date, refer to page

82

.

▷

Energy recovery, refer to page 83

.

▷ Transmission display, refer to page

75

.

▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page

82

.

77


Seite 78

Controls Displays

▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to

page 78 .

▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to

page 83 .

▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation.

▷

Range, refer to page 82 .

▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to

page 122

.

▷ Service requirements, refer to page

83

.

▷

Speed limit detection, refer to page 84

.

▷ Time, refer to page

82 .

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

Check Control

The concept

The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.

A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐ play.

Indicator/warning lights


The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ nations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner are defective.

Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ ice center immediately.

Parking brake, brake system

For additional information, refer to Re‐ lease parking brake, refer to page

69 .

Front-end collision warning

Illuminated: advance warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ ger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Increase distance.

Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐ ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed.

Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ neuver.

Pedestrian warning

Symbol in the instrument cluster.

78


Seite 79


If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead.

For additional information, refer to Active

Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC,

refer to page 126

.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐ tected.

Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐ quate for operating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Anti-lock Braking System ABS

Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐ ing force boost in some cases defec‐ tive. Stop carefully. Take into account longer brake travel. Have this checked by the service center immediately.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Flashing: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐ lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving profile to the driving circumstances.

Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system checked by the service center.

For additional information, refer to Dynamic

Stability Control DSC, refer to page

119 .

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction

Control is activated

Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol DTC is switched on.

For additional information, refer to Dynamic

Stability Control, refer to page

119

, and Dy‐

namic Traction Control, refer to page 120

.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau‐ tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐ neuvers.

For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐

fer to page 104

.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be detected.

▷ Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform the reset of the system again.

▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if needed.

▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.

79


Seite 80


For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor, refer to page

100 .

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are activated.

For additional information, refer to

Front fog lights, refer to page

95 .

Steering system

Steering system in some cases defec‐ tive.

Have the steering system checked by the service center.

Engine functions

Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ ice center.

For additional information, refer to Onboard Diagnostics socket, refer to page

209 .

High-beam Assistant

uation.

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are activated and off auto‐ matically as a function of the traffic sit‐

For additional information, refer to High-beam

Assistant, refer to page 94

.

Lane departure warning

System is switched on and under cer‐ tain circumstances warns if a detected lane is left without flashing beforehand.

For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐ ture warning, refer to page

114 .

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

For additional information, refer to Turn signal,

refer to page 69

.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the con‐ trol elements on the steering wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are activated.

For additional information, refer to High beams, refer to page

70 .

General lamps

Check Control

cluster.

At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored. The symbol is shown in the display of the instrument

Parking lights, headlight control

Parking lights or headlights are acti‐ vated.

For additional information, refer to

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐ fer to page

92 .

Text messages

Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ trol message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lights.

80


Seite 81


Supplementary text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Symbols

Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected.

▷

▷

▷

"Owner's Manual"

Display additional information about the

Check Control message in the Integrated

Owner's Manual.

"Service request"

Contact your service center.

"Roadside Assistance"

Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

They are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages


1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

"Check Control"

4.

Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion

Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Fuel gauge

Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary.

Depending on the equipment version, the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Hints on refueling, refer to page

186 .

Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.

▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ sages are displayed consecutively.

These messages can be faded for approx.

8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ played again automatically.

▷ Other Check Control messages are faded automatically after approx. 20 seconds.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ rupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature

▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low temperature end.

Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds.

▷ Normal operating tempera‐ ture: the pointer is in the

81


Seite 82


middle or in the left half of the temperature display.

▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of the temperature range. A Check Control message is also displayed.

Ice on roads

Even at temperatures above

+37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy.

Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk of an accident.◀

Coolant temperature

If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.

Check the coolant level, refer to page 207

.

Time

The time is displayed at the bot‐ tom of the instrument cluster.

Setting the time and time for‐

mat, refer to page 89

.

Odometer and trip odometer

Display

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.

▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Date

The date is displayed in the computer.

Setting the date and date for‐

mat, refer to page 89

.

Show/reset kilometers

Press the knob.

▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time, the external temperature and the odometer are displayed.

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

External temperature

If the indicator drops to

+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Range

Display

With a low remaining range:

▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly.

▷ The remaining range is shown on the on-board co‐ mupter.

▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking curves aggressively - engine operation might vary.

The Check Control message appears continu‐ ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly

Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.◀

82


Seite 83


Displaying the cruising range

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the range can also be displayed as bar in the instrument cluster.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Instrument cluster"

3.

"Additional indicators"

Energy recovery

Display

The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy while coasting. The vehicle bat‐ tery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced.

Current fuel consumption

Instrument cluster

Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an effi‐ cient and environmentallyfriendly manner.

Instrum. cluster with enhanced features

Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an effi‐ cient and environmentallyfriendly manner.

Displaying the current fuel consumption

1.

"Settings"

2.


3.

"Additional indicators"

The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Service requirements

The concept

After the ignition is turned on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ nance.

Your service specialist can read the current service requirements from your remote con‐ trol.

Display

Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cally transmitted to your service center before a service due date.

Detailed information on service requirements

More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play.


1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

"Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and le‐ gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4.

Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion.

83


Seite 84


Symbols

Sym‐ bols

Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled mainte‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ tion is approaching.

The service deadline has already passed.

Gear shift indicator

The concept

The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ cient gear for the current driving situation.

Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐ tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐ tronic transmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐ played in the instrument cluster.

Steptronic transmission: displays

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the required inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.


1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

"Service required"

4.

"§ Vehicle inspection"

5.

"Date:"

6.

Adjust the settings.

7.

Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cally transmitted to your service center before a service due date.

You can check when your service center was notified.


1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

Open "Options".

4.

"Last Service Request"

84

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Speed limit detection

The concept


Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera in the area of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐ head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐ bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐ tected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

The system takes into account the information stored in the navigation system and also dis‐ plays speed limits present on routes without signs.


Seite 85


Hints

Personal judgment

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation.

The system assists the driver and does not re‐ place the human eye.◀

At a glance

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off


1.

"Settings"

2.


3.

"Speed limit information"

If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ ment cluster via the computer.

Display

The following is displayed in the instrument cluster:


Current speed limit.

Speed limit detection is not available.

Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ lowing situations:

▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

▷ When signs are concealed by objects.

▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.

▷ When driving toward bright lights.

▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered by a sticker, etc.

▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.

▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem.

▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing.

▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.

▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment.

85


Seite 86


Selection lists in the instrument cluster

The concept

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the following can be displayed or operated us‐ ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐ strument cluster and the Head-up Display:

▷ Current audio source.

▷ Redial phone feature.

▷ Turn on voice activation system.

It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐ namics Control.

Display

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.

Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.

On-board computer

Indication in the info display

The information from the com‐ puter is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster.

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the illustration shown.

Calling up information on the info display

86

Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the info display of the instrument cluster.


Seite 87


Information at a glance

Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the info display:

▷ Range.

▷ Average consumption, fuel.

▷ Average consumption, fuel.

▷ Average speed.

▷ Date.

▷ Speed limit detection.

▷ Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

▷ Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

▷ ECO PRO bonus range.

Adjusting the info display

Depending on the vehicle equipment version, you can select what information from the com‐ puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.


1.

"Settings"

2.


3.

Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel.

It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

If there is only enough fuel left for less than

45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running.

The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the on-board comupter.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.

Distance to destination

The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ gation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ tomatically.

Time of arrival

The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en‐ tered in the navigation system before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.


Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page

84 , function.

Trip computer

The vehicle features two types of board com‐ puters.

▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary.

▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an overview of the current trip.

87


Seite 88


Resetting the trip computer


1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Trip computer"

3.

"Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a standstill.

Display on the Control Display

Display the computer or trip computer on the

Control Display.

1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption or speed


1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Onboard info"

3.

"Consumpt." or "Speed"

4.

"Yes"

Sport displays

The concept

On the Control Display, the current values for performance and torque can be displayed if the vehicle is appropriately equipped.

Displaying sport displays on the

Control Display

1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Sport displays"

Speed warning

The concept

Displays a speed, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued.

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed once by at least

3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the speed warning


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Speed"

3.

"Warning at:"

4.

Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed.

5.


Speed warning is stored.

Activating/deactivating the speed warning


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Speed"

3.

"Warning"

4.


Setting your current speed as the speed warning


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Speed"

3.

"Select current speed"

4.


The current vehicle speed is stored as the speed warning.

88


Seite 89


Settings on the Control

Display

Time

Setting the time zone

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Time/Date"

3.

"Time zone:"

4.

Select the desired time zone.

The time zone is stored.

Setting the time

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Time/Date"

3.

"Time:"

4.

Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed.

5.


6.

Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ nutes are displayed.

7.


The time is stored.

Setting the time format

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Time/Date"

3.

"Format:"

4.

Select the desired format.

The time format is stored.

Automatic time setting

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are updated automatically.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Time/Date"

3.

"Auto time set"

Date

Setting the date

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Time/Date"

3.

"Date:"

4.

Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed.

5.


6.

Make the necessary settings for the month and year.

The date is stored.

Setting the date format

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Time/Date"

3.

"Format:"

4.

Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the language

To set the language on the Control Display:

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Language/Units"

3.

"Language:"

4.

Select the desired language.


Setting the voice dialog

Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page

28

.

89


Seite 90


Units of measure

Setting the units of measure

To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature:

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Language/Units"

3.

Select the desired menu item.

4.

Select the desired unit.


Brightness

Setting the brightness

To set the brightness of the Control Display:

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Control display"

3.

"Brightness"

4.

Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set.

5.



Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness settings may not be clearly visible.

Assist system information


Information on the Assist system can be dis‐ played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐ play.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Control display"

3.

"Driver assistance info"

Head-up Display

The concept

This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.

The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.

Display visibility

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up

Display is influenced by the following factors:

▷ Certain sitting positions.

▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ play.

▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.

▷ Wet roads.

▷ Unfavorable light conditions.

If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ tings.


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Head-Up Display"

3.

"Head-Up Display"

Display

Overview

▷ Speed.

▷ Navigation system.

▷ Check Control messages.

▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.

90


Seite 91


▷ Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up

Display


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Head-Up Display"

3.

"Displayed information"

4.

Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display.



The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Head-Up Display"

3.

"Brightness"

4.

Turn the controller.

When the low beams are activated, the bright‐ ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐ ally influenced using the instrument lighting.


Adjusting the height


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Head-Up Display"

3.

"Height"

4.



Setting the rotation


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Head-Up Display"

3.

"Rotation"

4.



Special windshield

The windshield is part of the system.

The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image.

A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ ages from being displayed.

Therefore, have the special windshield re‐ placed by a service center only.

91


Seite 92

Controls Lights

Lights



Overview

1 Rear fog lights

2 Front fog lights

3 Depending on the equipment: automatic headlight control, Adaptive Light Control,

High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights,

Daytime running lights

4 Lights off, daytime running lights

5 Parking lights, daytime running lights

6 Depending on the equipment: low beams, welcome lights, High-beam Assistant

7 Instrument lighting

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control


Position of switch: , ,

If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐ cally switched off at these switch settings.

Parking lights

Position of switch : the vehicle's lights light up on all sides, e.g., for parking.

Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to start the en‐ gine.

When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to page

93 .

Low beams

Position of switch with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lights

When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in position or : parking and interior lights come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked depending on the ambient brightness.



1.

"Settings"

2.

"Lighting"

3.

"Welcome lights"


92


Seite 93

Lights Controls

Headlight courtesy delay feature

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the radioready state is switched off.

Setting the duration


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Lighting"

3.

"Pathway lighting:"

4.

Set length of time.


Automatic headlight control

Position of switch : the low beams are acti‐ vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

When emerging from a tunnel during the day, the low beams are not switched off immedi‐ ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

The low beams always stay on when the fog lights are activated.

Personal responsibility

The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ ment in determining when to turn the lights on in response to ambient lighting conditions.

E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under these conditions, you should always switch on the lights manually.◀

Daytime running lights

With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ ning lights light up in position , or

. After the ignition is switched off, the park‐ ing lights light up in position .


In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ vate the daytime running lights.


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Lighting"

3.

"Daytime running lamps"


Roadside parking lights

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switch off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Adaptive Light Control

The concept

Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ tion of the road surface.

Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ rameters, the light from the headlight follows the course of the road.

93


Seite 94

Controls Lights

In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, one of the two front fog lights is switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the inside of the curve is better lighted.

Activating

Position of switch with the ignition switched on.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.

The turning lights are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals.

When driving in reverse, the turning lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle.

Malfunction


Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High-beam Assistant

The concept

When the low beams are activated, this system automatically switches the high beams on and off or suppresses the light in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐ trolled by a camera on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are activated whenever the traffic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams non and off as usual.

Note


The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐ ment of when to use the high beams. There‐ fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐ tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀

Activating

1.

Depending on the equipment, turn the light switch into position or .

2.

Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐ row.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐ tomatically brightened or dimmed.

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. Depend‐ ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐ ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, the blue indicator light will stay on.

94


Seite 95

Lights Controls

Switching the high beams on and off manually

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐ vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ ton on the turn signal lever.

System limits

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary:

▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.

▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ coming traffic on freeways.

▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs.

▷ At low speeds.

▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights


The low beams must be switched on.

Press button. The green indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page

93

, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights.

When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Instrument lighting

Adjusting

The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights


The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐ cally.

Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ trols brightness of some of these features.


95

Seite 96

Controls Lights

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lights on and off

Press button.

To reel off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds.

Switch back on: press button.

Reading lights

Press button.

Reading lights are located at the front and rear next to the interior lights.

Ambient light

Depending on your optional features lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.

Selecting color scheme


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Lighting"

3.

"Ambient:"

4.

Select desired setting.

With a color scheme selected and welcome lights activated they illuminate in the line's color when vehicle is unlocked.


The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐ justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Lighting"

3.

"Brightness:"

4.

Adjust the brightness.

96


Seite 97

Safety Controls

Safety



Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbags

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ equate restraint.

Side airbags

In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags

In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

97


Seite 98

Controls Safety

Ejection Mitigation

The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag

The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Protective action

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.

▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.

▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐ jects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ tach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS devices or' mobile phones.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries might occur when front airbag is activated.

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries might occur when airbag is activated.

▷ Do not remove the airbag system.

▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.

▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ bag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system.

This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the roofliner.◀

Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐ ploying the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme‐ diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, you may risk burns.

Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the service center or an authorized repair shop for handling explosives.

Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tem could lead to failure in an emergency or unintentional activation of the airbag - both may lead to injury.◀

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐ ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐

98


Seite 99

Safety Controls

erational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning

▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on.

▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.

In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐ tem checked immediately.

In case of a malfunction have airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in case of a severe accident.◀

Automatic deactivation of the frontseat passenger airbags

The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ sistance.

Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ vated.

Leave feet in the footwell

Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, proper functioning of the front passenger air‐ bag might not be assured.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ structions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.◀

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system

When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.

To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion

▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by your vehicle's manufacturer.

▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

▷ No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags.

The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ ther activated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint fix‐ ing system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient

99


Seite 100

Controls Safety

size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated.

Detected child seats

The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐ quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐ factured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag

The explosive power that activates driver's/ front passenger's airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐ er's seat.

With a respective message appearing on Con‐ trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep the accuracy of this function over the longterm.

Calibrating the front seats

A corresponding message appears on the

Control Display.

1.

Press the reel and move the respective seat all the way forward.

2.

Press the reel forward again. The seat still moves forward slightly.

3.

Readjust the seat to the desired position.

The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disap‐ pears.

If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ peat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movement

Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.◀

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The concept

The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and tire temperature.

Hints

Tire damage due to external factors

Sudden tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐ vance.◀

With use of the system observe further infor‐ mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐ fer to page

190 .


The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is not assured.

Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly.

Status display

The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.


1.

"Vehicle info"

100


Seite 101

Safety Controls

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

"Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"

The status is displayed.

Status control display

Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the

Control Display.

All wheels green

System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One wheel is yellow

A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow

A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires.

Wheels, gray

The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be:

▷ The system is being reset.

▷ Malfunction.

Status information

The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐ pending on the model, tire temperatures. It shows the actual values read; they may vary depending on driving style or weather condi‐ tions.

Carry out reset

Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

On the Control Display and on the vehicle:

1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

"Perform reset"

4.

Start the engine - do not drive off.

5.

Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform reset".

6.

Drive away.

The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed.

After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The reset is completed automatically while driving.

After a successfully completed Reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Low tire pressure message

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A

Check Control message is displayed.

▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

▷ No reset was performed for the system.

The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures before the last reset.

1.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers.

2.

Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page

197

, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

101


Seite 102

Controls Safety

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀

A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC

Dynamic Stability Control.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1.

Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires.

The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐

tem, refer to page 197

, can possibly be used for this purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is shown to be correct, it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a reset. Then perform the reset.

If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2.

Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with the

Mobility System.

Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if needed.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1.


2.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3.

Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is shown to be correct, it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a reset. In that case, carry out a reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ ing style and road conditions.

A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.

A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire

Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ duced when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change.◀

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving and contact your service center.◀

102


Seite 103

Safety Controls

Required tire inflation pressure check message

A Check Control message is displayed in the following situations

▷ The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.

▷ Inflation was not carried out according to specifications.

▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last confirmation.

In this case:

▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.

▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire change.

System limits

The system does not function properly if a re‐ set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Malfunction

The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check

Control message is displayed. No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ tected.

Display in the following situations:

▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if needed.

▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.

▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.

Reset the system again.

▷ Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/

FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring

System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐

103


Seite 104

Controls Safety

sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor

The concept

The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ tween the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. This will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual infla‐ tion pressure in the tires.


The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐ sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

Status display

The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.


1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

"Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"

104


The status is displayed.

Initialization

When initializing the once set inflation tire pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ firming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.


1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

"Perform reset"

4.

Start the engine - do not drive off.

5.

Start the initialization with "Perform reset".

6.

Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A

Check Control message is displayed.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

1.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.


2.

Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 197

, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀

Seite 105

Safety Controls

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on if needed.

System limits

Sudden tire damage

Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.◀

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

▷ When the system has not been initialized.

▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.

▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1.

Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires.

The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐

tem, refer to page 197

, can possibly be used for this purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2.

Fix the flat tire where applicable using the

Mobility System, refer to page

197 .

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1.


2.


3.

Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ ing style and road conditions.

A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.

A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.


Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

105


Seite 106

Controls Safety

Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ duced when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change.◀

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving and contact your service center.◀

Be alert

Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀

Tow-starting and towing

For tow-starting or towing, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety

The concept

Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system.

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐ telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐ tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐ sion. These systems are active automatically every time the engine is started using the

Start/Stop button:

▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to

page 107

.

▷

Pedestrian warning, refer to page 112

.

Hints


The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation.

Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

Adapting your speed and driving style

The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

Intelligent Safety button

Camera



106


Seite 107

Safety Controls


The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cally active after every departure.

Press button: the systems are turned off. The LED goes out.

Press button: the systems are turned on. The

LED lights up.

Settings can be made on the Control Display.


The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx.

3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.

Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to

35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Front-end collision warning

Depending on the equipment, the collision warning system consists of one of the two sys‐ tems:

▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐

ing function, refer to page 107

.

▷ Front-end collision warning with braking

function, refer to page 109

It responds to objects if they are detected by the system.

Front-end collision warning with City Braking function

The concept

The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed.

The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ently if needed.

The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration.

A camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system.

The front-end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally the collision warning is delayed avoiding false alarm.

Hints






Be alert


107


Seite 108

Controls Safety




At a glance



Camera




Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every driving-off.

Switch off

Press button: the system is switched off. The LED goes out.

Re-press button: the system is switched on.

The LED lights up.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via iDrive.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Frontal Coll. Warning"

3.

Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.

The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing.

Brake and increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing.

You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ ver.

Prewarning

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning.

108


Seite 109

Safety Controls

Acute warning with braking function

Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ vention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous prewarning.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop.

The braking intervention is executed only if

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric‐ tions are to be considered.

System limits

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late.

E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ tected:

▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.

▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.

▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.


The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall.

▷ In tight curves.

▷ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.

▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment version, the field of view of the camera in the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐ scured.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob.


▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are, e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ cess of false warnings.

Front-end collision warning with braking function

The concept

The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed.

The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ently if needed.

109


Seite 110

Controls Safety

The automatic braking intervention is executed with limited braking force and for a brief period only.

If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise

Control with Stop & Go, the front-end collision warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐ dar sensor.

The front-end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally the collision warning is delayed avoiding false alarm.


The system issues a two-phase warning of a possible danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐ uation.

Detection range



Be alert





At a glance


It responds to objects if they are detected by the system.

Hints





Radar sensor

A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle.

110


Seite 111

Safety Controls

A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐ tection of vehicles.

▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ move layers of snow and ice carefully.

▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor.




Switch off

Press button: the system is switched off. The LED goes out.

Re-press button: the system is switched on.

The LED lights up.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via iDrive.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Frontal Coll. Warning"

3.

Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.

The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use.


Display

If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing.

Brake and increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing.

You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ ver.

Prewarning

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking function

Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by an automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous prewarning.


The detection of objects can be influenced by technical system limitations, e. g. pedestrians or stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐ tion range and functional restrictions are to be considered.

111


Seite 112

Controls Safety

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with automatic braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐ cle to a complete stop.



Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.

No automatic delay occurs.


System limits

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.



▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.

▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.

▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

▷ Pedestrians.

▷ Stationary objects.





▷ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.

▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are, e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ cess of false warnings.

Pedestrian warning with city braking function

The concept

The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐ destrians.

The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function.

The camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system.


In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐ sions with pedestrians at speeds from about

6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h shortly before a collision the system supports you with a braking intervention.

Under those circumstances it reacts to people who are within the detection range of the sys‐ tem.

112


Seite 113

Safety Controls

Detection range




At a glance


The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas.

▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.

▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.


Camera

Hints






Be alert







113


Seite 114

Controls Safety

Switch off

Press button: the systems are turned off. The LED goes out.

Press button: the systems are turned on. The

LED lights up.


Display

If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.


The warning prompts the driver himself/herself to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop.




Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric‐ tions are to be considered.

System limits

Detection range

The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ ited.



▷ Partially covered pedestrians.

▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.

▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.

▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.


The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations:



▷ If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.

▷ If the camera viewing field or the front windshield are dirty or covered.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob.


▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky.

▷ When it is dark outside.

Lane departure warning

The concept

Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. This speed, depending on the country version, is between 35 mph/55 km/h and

45 mph/70 km/h.

114


Seite 115

Safety Controls

When switching on the system below this speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster.

The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ uation.

The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

Hints


The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation.

In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐ cle.◀

At a glance


Lane departure warning

Camera




Press button.




Display in the instrument cluster

▷ Lines: system is activated.

▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued.

Issued warning

If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ brating.

If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning

The warning ends:

▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.

▷ When returning to your own lane.

▷ When braking hard.

115


Seite 116

Controls Safety

▷ When using the turn signal.

System limits



▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐ ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.

▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.

▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

▷ When the lane markings are covered by objects.

▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.

▷ When driving toward bright lights.

▷ When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc.


The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐ med.

Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ uations described above.

The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.

Hints




At a glance


Active Blind Spot Detection

The concept

Active Blind Spot Detection

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.

The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.

116


Seite 117

Safety Controls

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper.


Press button.




Display

Lamp in the exterior mirror housing

Information stage

The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ ing indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.

Warning

If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes brightly.

The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone.

System limits


▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own.


▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered with stickers.

A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional.




FCC ID:

▷ NBG009014A.







117


Seite 118

Controls Safety

Brake force display

The concept

▷ During normal brake application, the outer brake lights light up.

▷ During heavy brake application, the inner brake lights light up in addition.

Attentiveness assistant

The concept

The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐ notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break.

Note


The system cannot act as a substitute for the personal assessment of one's physical state and may not detect an increasing lack of alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐ tected too late and an accident be caused as a result.◀

Function

The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off.

After travel has begun, the system is trained about the driver, so that increasing lack of alertness or fatigue can be detected.

This procedure takes the following criteria into account:

▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐ ior.

▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen‐ dation to take a break.

Break recommendation

If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control

Display with the recommendation to take a break.

A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip.

After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ mately 45 minutes.

System limits

The function may be limited in the following situations, for instance, and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all:

▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.

▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h.

▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.

▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently.

▷ When the road surface is poor.

▷ In the event of strong side winds.

118


Seite 119

Driving stability control systems Controls

Driving stability control systems



Antilock Brake System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle contains its steering power even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety.

ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the greatest possible braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ tance to a minimum during emergency stop.

This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐ cle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

Note

Adjust your driving style to the situation

An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not even with DSC.

Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.◀

Do not deactivate DSC when driving with roof load

Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control

DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roofmounted luggage rack.

Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐ ing-critical situation due to the elevated center of gravity.◀

Overview


DSC Dynamic Stability

Control

The concept

DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels when driving off and accelerating.

DSC OFF button

119


Seite 120

Controls Driving stability control systems


The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not lon‐ ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.

The DSC system is switched off.

The steering and, depending on the equip‐ ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.

The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions or loose road surfaces, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ what limited driving stability.

Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves.

Therefore drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.

▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driving off from loose grounds.

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic

Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC

OFF lights up.

Activating DSC

Press button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out.


When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Deactivating DTC

Press button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ tor lamp go out.

DTC Dynamic Traction

Control

The concept

The DTC system is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized.

xDrive

xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics.

The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface.

120


Seite 121


Dynamic Damping Control

The concept

This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ eling on uneven road surfaces.

The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort fitting road surface and driving style.

Programs

The system offers several different programs.

Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics

Control, refer to page 122 .

SPORT

Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility.

SPORT+

Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility when driving with limited driving stabilization.

COMFORT/ECO PRO

Balanced control of the vehicle.

Active rear spoiler

The concept

The active rear spoiler increases driving stabil‐ ity. It extends and retracts automatically de‐ pending on the driving speed.

Hints


Keep the movement area of the rear spoiler free from obstructions such as icing, otherwise it may be damaged.◀

Do not take hold of the rear spoiler to push the vehicle

Do not use the rear spoiler to push the vehicle, as this may damage the vehicle or lead to inju‐ ries.◀

Follow the instructions for car-wash systems, refer to page

226 , and Care instructions, refer

to page

228 .

Overview

Activate manual/ automatic mode

Variable sport steering

The variable sport steering increases the steering angle of the front wheels at large steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or when parking. Steering becomes more direct.

It also varies the force required to turn the wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.

This results in a sporty steering response. In addition, it becomes easier to steer during parking and maneuvering.

Press button.

▷ LED on: manual mode.

▷ LED off: automatic mode.

The selected operating mode is retained even after the ignition has been switched off.

121


Seite 122


Automatic mode

A retracted rear spoiler is in automatic mode when the engine is started. The system may be initialized while driving, and if this happens the rear spoiler moves slightly.

Automatic extension

When traveling faster than 65 mph/110 km/h.

Automatic retraction

When slowing to a speed below

45 mph/70 km/h.

Note

Rear spoilers cannot be retracted manually when traveling at speeds above

65 mph/110 km/h.

Manual mode

Manual mode can be used for example for cleaning the rear spoiler with the ignition switched on or the engine running.


Keep the movement area of the rear spoiler free from icing, e.g., otherwise injuries may occur.◀

Extending the rear spoiler

Press button.

The LED lights up, the rear spoiler is extended.

Retracting the rear spoiler

Possible at vehicle speeds below

65 mph/110 km/h.

Press button.

The rear spoiler is retracted and the LED goes out.

The system is in automatic mode.

At vehicle speeds below 10 mph/20 km/h:

Hold down button.

The rear spoiler is retracted and the LED goes out.

The system is in automatic mode.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed. The rear spoiler is no longer extended or retracted automatically.

Allow the system to cool down, and if needed have it checked by the service center.

If a malfunction occurs, the Dynamic Stability

Control DSC is activated at speeds higher than

45 mph/70 km/h.

If the rear spoiler no longer extends, do not ex‐ ceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h for the rest of the journey.

Driving Dynamics Control

The concept

The Driving Dynamics Control helps to finetune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐ ous programs can be selected for this purpose.

The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC

OFF buttons can each be used to activate a program.

Overview


122


Seite 123


Operating the programs

Press button Program

DSC OFF

TRACTION

SPORT+

SPORT

COMFORT

ECO PRO

Automatic program change

The system may automatically switch to COM‐

FORT in the following situations:

▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.

▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.

▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐

TION or DSC OFF mode.

DSC OFF

When DSC OFF, refer to page 120

, is active, driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves.

TRACTION

When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC

Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page

120 , is

activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐ celeration and when driving in curves.

SPORT+

Sporty driving with optimized suspension and adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ bilization.

Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.

The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks.

Activating SPORT+

Press button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.

Automatic program change

When activating cruise control, the program automatically switches to SPORT mode.


SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:

Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

SPORT

Depending on the equipment, consistently sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and engine control for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization.

The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the profile currently in use.

Activating SPORT

Press button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORT

When the display is activated on the Control

Display, refer to page

124 , the SPORT driving

mode can be set to individual specifications.

▷ Activating SPORT.

▷ "Configure SPORT"

▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.

SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ vated:

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Driving mode"

3.

"Configure SPORT"

4.

Configure driving mode.

123


Seite 124


This configuration is retrieved when the

SPORT driving mode is activated.

COMFORT

For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization.

Activating COMFORT

cluster.

Press button repeatedly until COM‐

FORT is displayed in the instrument

In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page

123 .

ECO PRO

ECO PRO, refer to page

177 , provides consis‐

tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ zation.

Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted.

The program can be configured to individual specifications.

Activating ECO PRO

cluster.

Press button repeatedly until ECO

PRO is displayed in the instrument

Configuring ECO PRO

1.

Activate ECO PRO.

2.

"Configure ECO PRO"

Make the desired settings.

Configuring driving program

Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Driving mode:

▷

SPORT, refer to page 123

.

▷

ECO PRO, refer to page 178 .

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs.

Depending on your vehicle's op‐ tional features, the list in the in‐ strument cluster can differ from the illustration shown.

Selected program

The instrument cluster displays the selected program.


Program changes can be displayed on the

Control Display.

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Control display"

3.

"Driving mode info"

Drive-off assistant

This system supports driving off on inclines.

The parking brake is not required.

1.

Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.

2.

Release the foot brake and drive off with‐ out delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐ sions, the possible holding duration amounts to 2 minutes.

Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

124


Seite 125


Driving off without delay

After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to roll back.◀

Servotronic

The concept

The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐ quired to turn the wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐ ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐ creases, the assistance of the steering force is reduced.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐ ing to the driving program, so that a direct, sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐ veyed.


125

Seite 126

Controls Driving comfort

Driving comfort



Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go function, ACC

The concept

Use this system to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear roads.

To the extent possible, the system automati‐ cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you.

The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied.

For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.

To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ tomatically reduces the speed, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ cle ahead begins moving faster.

If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ riod, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. Your own vehicle will brake automatically and then accelerate again.

If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐ celerator pedal or press the appropriate button to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐ matically accelerate.

As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐ erates to the desired speed.

The speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained uphill if engine power is insufficient.


Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

Hints


Even an active system holds the driver responsible for his or her driving, particularly for staying in your lane, adjusting your speed, keeping your distance and for your driving style all in relation to traffic.

Technically the system has its limits, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations.

Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed, e.g. through braking, steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk of accident.◀

Unfavorable weather conditions

In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer recognition of vehicles as well as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already de‐ tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐ rent traffic situation. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀

126


Seite 127

Driving comfort Controls

Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against moving on its own.

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning: set the parking brake and ensure that the

Steptronic transmission is in position P. Other‐ wise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press but‐ ton

Function

System on/off, interrupt, refer

to page 127

Store, maintain speed, refer to page

128

Resume speed, refer to page

129

Reduce distance, refer to page

129

Increase distance, refer to page

129

rocker switch:

Maintain, store, change speed, refer to page

128

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifica‐ tions.

Radar sensor

A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle.

A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐ tection of vehicles.

▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ move layers of snow and ice carefully.

▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press button on the steering wheel.

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed.

Cruise control can be used.

Switch off

Deactivated or interrupted system

With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes, steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident.◀

To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time.

Press button.

▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

127


Seite 128


Interrupting

When active, press the button.

If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

▷ When the brakes are applied.

▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ gaged.

▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated.

▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.

▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.

▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are opened while the vehicle is standing still.

▷ If the system has not detected objects for an extended period, e.g., on a road with very little traffic without curb or shoulder markings.

▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog.

Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed

Hints

Adjusting the desired speed

Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀

Differences in speed

Large differences in speed relative to ve‐ hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐ sated by the system for example in the follow‐ ing situations:

▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle.

▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane.◀

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press button.

Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

This is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster. Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page

129

.

When cruise control is maintained or stored,

DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed.

Changing the speed

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx.

1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action.

128


Seite 129


Distance

Select a distance

Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.◀

Reduce distance

Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired distance is set.

Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐

tance, refer to page 129

.

Increase distance

Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired distance is set.

Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐

tance, refer to page 129 .

Calling up the desired speed and distance

While driving

Press button with the system switched on.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

▷ When the system is switched off.

▷ When the ignition is switched off.

While standing

The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill:

▷ Green marking in the speedometer:

Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐ dar sensor moves off.

▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐ tomatic driving off.

To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐ matically, press the accelerator or press the RES or SET button.

Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that the the vehicle detected by the radar sen‐ sor has driven off.

Your vehicle was brought down to a halt through stepping on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle:

1.

Press button to call up a stored desired speed.

2.

Release the brake pedal.

3.

Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the

RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away.


Desired speed

▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active.

▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

Brief status display

Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check

Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for operations.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐ ing ahead of you.

129


Seite 130


Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set after the system is switched on.

The system has been interrupted or distance control is temporarily sup‐ pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is temporarily sup‐ pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.

ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal, pressing the RES but‐ ton or rocker switch.



The indicator and warning lights do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

The vehicle symbol lights up orange:

A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange:

The conditions are not adequate for the sys‐ tem to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds:

You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Displays in the Head-up Display

Some system information can also be dis‐ played in the Head-up Display.

System limits

Speed range

The system is best used on well-constructed roads.

The minimum speed that can be set is

20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set depends on the vehicle.

The system can also be activated when sta‐ tionary.

Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ uation when using the system.

Detection range

The detection lidacity of the system and the automatic braking lidacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for instance might not be detected.

130


Seite 131


Limited detection potential

Because of the limited possible detec‐ tion, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene if needed; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate when a sta‐ tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic congestion.

The system also does not respond to:

▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road users.

▷ Red traffic lights.

▷ Stationary objects.

▷ Cross traffic.

▷ Oncoming traffic.

No warnings

A warning may not be issued when ap‐ proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐ stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐ hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐ vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other‐ wise, there is the risk of an accident.◀

Unexpected lane change

If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐ cle, you yourself must react, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles.

Cornering

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

Swerving vehicles

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

In tight curves the system offers only restricted detection where a vehicle ahead of you might be detected late or not at all.

131


Seite 132


When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐ ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐ ating.

After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐ activated and controls speed independently.

Driving away

In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example:

▷ On steep inclines.

▷ From behind bumps in the road.

In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

Radar sensor




FCC ID:

▷ OAYARS3-A







Malfunction

The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, e.g.

A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails.

Cruise control

The concept

The system maintains a preset speed via the buttons on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking is insufficient.


Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

Hints

Unfavorable conditions

Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ stant speed, e.g.:

▷ On winding roads.

▷ In heavy traffic.

▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ cle and cause an accident.◀

132


Seite 133


Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel


System on/off, interrupt

Store speed

Resume speed rocker switch: change, hold, store speed

Controls

Switching on

Press button on the steering wheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed.

Cruise control can be used.

Switch off

Deactivated or interrupted system

With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes, steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident.◀

Press button.

▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting

When active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if:

▷ The brakes are applied.

▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ gaged.

▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ rent speed.

▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.

▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated.

▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.

▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.

Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed

Hints

Adjusting the desired speed

Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press button.

Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

This is displayed, refer to page

134 , in the

speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.

133


Seite 134


When cruise control is maintained or stored,

DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed.

Changing the speed

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx.

1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

The maximum speed that can be set de‐ pends on the vehicle.

▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ celerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal.

After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐ hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speed

Press button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.


Indicator lamp

Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ tem is switched on.

Desired speed

▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active.

▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

Brief status display

Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check

Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for operations.

Displays in the Head-up Display

Some system information can also be dis‐ played in the Head-up Display.

PDC Park Distance Control

The concept

PDC is a support when parking. When you slowly approach an object in the rear - or also in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ ble - then the object is reported through:

▷ Signal tones.

▷ Visual display.


Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure the distances from objects.

The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐ stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.

6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given:

▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐ ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.

134


Seite 135


▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.

To ensure full functionality:

▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers, bicycle racks.

▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Hints


Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving.


Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed - risk of accident.◀

Avoid driving fast with PDC

Avoid approaching an object too fast.

Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐ tive.

For technical reasons, the system may other‐ wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

PDC Park Distance Control



With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ tion P R.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off manually

Press button.



Display

Signal tones

When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.

if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals.

If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: if objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with

Steptronic transmission.

Volume

The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐ justed similar to the sound and volume set‐ tings of the radio.

135


Seite 136



Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the

Control Display before a signal sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance

Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in the colors green, yellow and red.

When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ played, the reel can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances:

▷ For small children and animals.

▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.

▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

▷ With moving objects.

▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.

▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.

▷ For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warnings

PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

▷ In heavy rain.

▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.

▷ When sensors are covered in snow.

▷ On rough road surfaces.

▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.

▷ In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐ rages.

▷ In automatic car washes.

▷ Through heavy pollution.

▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐ ous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐ ger present, the system is again fully func‐ tional.

Malfunction


The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded area on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked.



▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐ sors.

136


Seite 137



At a glance


Surround View

The concept

Surround View comprises various camera as‐ sistance systems that help the driver when parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections.

▷

Rearview camera, refer to page 137

▷

Side View, refer to page 139

.

▷ Top View, refer to page

140 .

Rearview camera

Camera

Rearview camera

The concept

The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control

Display.

Hints

Check the traffic situation as well

Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera.◀

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by dirt.

Clean the camera lens, refer to page

229 .




The rearview camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive.




137


Seite 138


Switching on/off manually

Press button.



The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

Switching the view via iDrive

With PDC activated or Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.



▷ The rearview camera is switched on.

▷ The tailgate is fully closed.

Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be ac‐ tive at the same time.

▷ Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius are indicated.

▷ Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Pathway lines

▷ They help you to estimate how much space is needed when parking and maneu‐ vering on level pavement.

▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐ ing angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐ posed on the rearview camera image to‐ gether with pathway lines.

▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐ sible turning radius on a level road.

▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐ ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐ tain angle.

Obstacle marking

▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera.

Their colored margins match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐ tance to the object shown.

138


Seite 139


Parking using pathway and turning radius lines

1.

Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ dius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

System limits

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system.

Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC.

Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to page

134 .

The objects displayed on the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

2.

Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line.

Display settings

Brightness

With the rearview camera switched on:

1.

Select the symbol.

2.

Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:

1.

Select the symbol.

2.


Side View

The concept

Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐ tively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐ cle record the traffic situation on each side.

Hints

The images from both cameras are shown si‐ multaneously on the Control Display.


Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located out‐ side the picture area of the Side View cam‐ eras.◀

139


Seite 140


At a glance



Display

The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.

Side View

Cameras

Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle.

Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ ture the image.

The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt.

Clean the camera lenses, refer to page

229 .

Brightness

With the Side View switched on:

1.

"Brightness"

2.


Contrast

With the Side View switched on:

1.

"Contrast"

2.


System limits

The cameras lidture a maximum range of

330 ft/100 m.



Press button.



Top View

The concept

Top View provides assistance in parking and maneuvering. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose.

140


Seite 141



The image is lidtured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the rearview camera.

The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear.

In this way, obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early.

Hints


Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera.◀

Overview


Top View

Cameras

The lenses of the Top View camera are located at the bottom in the mirror housings. The im‐ age quality may be impaired by dirt.

Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 229

.




The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive.





Press button.



Top View is displayed.

Display

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display.

141


Seite 142


When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display.

The display appears as soon as Top View is activated.

When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ played, it is possible to reel to top view:

"Rear view camera"

Brightness

With Top View switched on:

1.

Select the symbol.

2.


Contrast

With Top View switched on:

1.

Select the symbol.

2.


Displaying the turning radius and pathway lines

▷ The static, red turning radius line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way.

▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space ac‐ tually needed to the side of the vehicle.

The lane line depends on the engaged gear and the current steering angle. The track line is continuously adjusted for the steering wheel movement.

"Parking aid lines"

Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

System limits

Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐ uations:

▷ With a door open.

▷ With the tailgate open.

▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.

▷ In poor light.

A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations.

Parking assistant

The concept

This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ lel to the road.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information and instructions issued by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐ view camera and react accordingly.

A component of the parking assistant is the

PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page

134 .

142


Seite 143


Hints


Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving.


Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed - risk of accident.◀

Changes to the parking space

Changes to the parking space after it was measured are not taken into account by the system.

Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀

Transporting cargo

Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure.

Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀

Curbs

The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ cle over or onto curb if need be.

Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐ cle may become damaged.◀

An engine that has been switched off by the

Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐ cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces

▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.

▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx.

4 ft/1.2 m.

▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Regarding the parking procedure

▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.

▷ Parking brake released.

▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set where applicable.

Overview


Parking assistant

143


Seite 144


Ultrasound sensors Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the side of the vehicle.




▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.

System status


Switching on with the button

Press button.

The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with the reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Switch off

The system can be deactivated as follows:

▷ Press button.

▷ Switch off the ignition.

▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant is activated and search for parking space active.

▷ Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ lighted.

▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ tive. Steering control has been taken over by system.

▷ Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ activated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.

144


Seite 145


Parking using the parking assistant


Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐ hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and

PDC's signals.

Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐ ger of an accident.◀

1.

Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐ vate it if needed.

The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

2.

Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play.

The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ cated on the Control Display.

3.

Adjust the parking position yourself if needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

▷

▷

"Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on the Control Display.

Press button.

Interrupting automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering.

▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the Control Display.

▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h.

▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces.

▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome, such as curbs.

▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly arise.

▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays clearances that are too small.

▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.

▷ If a turn signal has been actuated contrary to the desired side for parking.

▷ When switching to another function on the

Control Display.


Resume

An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ tinued if needed.

Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this.

System limits

No parking assistance

The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ tance in the following situations:




▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.

▷ On slippery ground.

▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.

▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances:

145


Seite 146


▷ For small children and animals.

▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.

▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

▷ With moving objects.

▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.

▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.

▷ For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Malfunction


The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.

146


Seite 147

Climate control Controls

Climate control



Automatic climate control

1 Seat heating, left 54

2 Vent settings

3 Rear window defroster

4 Air flow

5 AUTO program

6 Temperature

7 Seat heating, right

54

8 Cooling function

9 Recirculated-air mode

10 Interior temperature sensor

Hints

Sufficient ventilation

When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ dow condensation increases.◀

147


Seite 148

Controls Climate control

Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distribution

Turn the wheel to select the de‐ sired program or the desired in‐ termediate setting.

The cooling function, refer to page 148

, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ gram.

Temperature

Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.

▷

▷

▷

▷

Windows.

Upper body region.

Windows, upper body region, and foot‐ well.

Footwell.

Defrosts windows and removes condensation

Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ crease the air flow and temperature, and, if needed, use the cooling function.

Rear window defroster

Press button.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Air flow, manual

Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ duced automatically to save battery power.

AUTO program

Press button.

Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell.

The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if needed by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant.

Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature.

Cooling function

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press button.

The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ ting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ gine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control,

condensation water, refer to page 172

, devel‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

148


Seite 149


Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.

▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ nently blocked.

Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ tain amount of time in order to avoid window fogging.

If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.



Switching the system on/off

Switch off

Press the left button for the minimum speed.

Switching on

Press any button except

▷ Rear window defroster.

▷ Seat heating.

Microfilter

In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.

This filter should be replaced during scheduled

maintenance, refer to page 208

, of your vehi‐ cle.

Automatic climate control with enhanced features

1 Seat heating, left 54

2 Temperature, left


149

Seite 150


3 AUTO program

4 Display

5 Maximum cooling

6 Temperature, right

7 Seat heating, right 54

8 Cooling function

9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ lated-air mode

10 Air distribution, right

11 Air flow, AUTO intensity

12 Air distribution, left

13 Rear window defroster

14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep clear

15 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐ tion

Hints



Climate control functions in detail

Temperature

Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.

The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if needed by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant.

Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature.

AUTO program

Press button.

Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature,

AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell.

The cooling function, refer to page 151

, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ gram.

At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO program

With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ matic intensity control can be changed.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Maximum cooling

Press button.

The system is set to the lowest tem‐ perature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ gion. The vents need to be open for this.

The function is available above an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the engine running.

Adjust air flow with the program active.

150


Seite 151


Cooling function

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press button.

The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ ting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ gine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control,

condensation water, refer to page 172 , devel‐

ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode

You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.

▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automatically.

▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ manently blocked.

Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ tain amount of time in order to avoid window fogging.

If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.

Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.



Manual air distribution

Press button repeatedly to select a program:

▷ Upper body region.

▷ Upper body region and footwell.

▷ Footwell.

▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.

▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell: driver's side only.

If the windows are fogged over, press the

AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor.

Air flow, manual

To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐ gram first.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Rear window defroster

Press button.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

151


Seite 152


Defrosts windows and removes condensation

Press button.

Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ moved from the windshield and the front side windows.

For this purpose, point the side vents onto the side windows as needed.

Adjust air flow with the program active.

If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the

AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor.

Switching the system on/off

Switch off

Press the left button for the minimum speed.

Switching on

Press any button except

▷ Rear window defroster.

▷ Seat heating.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page

208 , of your vehi‐

cle.

Ventilation

Front ventilation

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 1.

▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 2.

▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature in the upper body region, arrow 3.

Toward blue: colder.

Toward red: warmer.

The set interior temperature for the driver and passenger are not changed.

Adjusting the ventilation

▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's interior is too hot.

▷ Draft-free ventilation:

Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

152


Seite 153


Ventilation in the rear

▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 1.

▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ row 2.

Toward blue: colder.

Toward red: warmer.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 3.

Parked-car ventilation

The concept

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐ cle interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.

The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature, either directly or by us‐ ing two preset reel-on times. It remains switched on for 30 minutes.

Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Climate"

3.

"Activate comf. ventilation"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the reel-on time


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Climate"

3.

"Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

4.

Set the desired time.

Activating the reel-on time


1.

"Settings"

2.

"Climate"

3.

"Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐ vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the system has been switched on.

The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐ vated.

153


Seite 154

Controls Interior equipment

Interior equipment



Compatibility

to be controlled, the system is gener‐ ally compatible with the universal garage door opener.

If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ ing or in the instructions of the system

If you have any questions, please contact:

▷ Your service center.

▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex

Corporation.

Control elements on the interior rearview mirror

Universal Integrated Remote

Control

The concept

The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐ tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener re‐ places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.

To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐ med with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control.

During programming

During programming and before activat‐ ing a device using the universal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐ mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐ trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury or damage.

Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

▷ LED, arrow 1.

▷ Buttons, arrow 2.

▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ quired for programming.

Programming


1.


2.

Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This

154


Seite 155

Interior equipment Controls

erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.

3.

Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to

8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ pends on the manual transmitter.

4.

Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be program‐ med on the interior rearview mirror. The

LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ gin flashing slowly.

5.

Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ rior rearview mirror has been programmed.

If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ tween the interior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step.

Several more attempts at different distan‐ ces may be necessary. Wait at least

15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds.

6.

To program other functions on other but‐ tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ rior rearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternatingcode wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternat‐ ing-code system.

Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear‐ view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐ peat for approximately 20 seconds.

For systems with an alternating-code system, the universal garage door opener and the sys‐ tem also have to be synchronized.

Please read the operating manual to find out how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ ond person.

To synchronize:

1.

Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ mote-controlled system.

2.

Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described.

3.

Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4.

Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately

3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐ zation is complete, the programmed func‐ tion will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

1.


2.

Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed.

3.

As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.

155


Seite 156


4.

Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held trans‐ mitter.

5.

Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐ idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the in‐ terior rearview mirror.

If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds.

Controls

Before operation

Before operating a system using the uni‐ versal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remote-controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage.

Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear‐ view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐ nal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions

Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐ proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror display

The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.

The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the con‐ trol button is pressed:

▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.

▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐ cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐ fer to World map with compass zones.

156


Seite 157

World map with magnetic zones


Procedure

1.

Press and hold the control button for ap‐ prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.

2.

To change the zone setting, press the con‐ trol button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corre‐ sponds with your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ pass is ready for use again after approximately

10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.

▷ The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel.

▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐ played.

Procedure

1.

Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.

2.

Set the currently applicable compass zone.

3.

Press and hold the control button for ap‐ prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐ cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering

The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language

Press and hold the control button for approx.

12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button again to reel between English "E" and

German "O".

157


Seite 158


Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ mately 10 seconds.

Replace the cover after use

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Sun visor

Glare shield

Fold the sun visor down or up.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Ashtray

Opening

The lighter is located next to the ashtray.

Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Raise cover.

Emptying

Take out the insert.

Lighter

Danger of burns

Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.

Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.◀

Connecting electrical devices

Hints

Do not connect charging devices to the

12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption.◀

Replace the cover after use

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Sockets


The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ ning or when the ignition is switched on.

158


Seite 159


Note

The total load of all sockets must not exceed

140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.

Front center console

In the trunk

The socket is located on the left side in the trunk.

Raise the lid and remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Rear center console

Remove the cover.

USB interface for data transfer

The concept

Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.:

▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page

35 .

▷ Music collection.

▷ Importing Trips.

Hints

Observe the following when connecting:

▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface.

▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface.

▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.

▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐ ing external devices.


159

Seite 160


Without telephone: overview Removing

Cargo cover in rear window

1.

Pull the cargo cover with both hands by the outer edges towards the rear, arrows 1, to disengage it from the catches.

The USB interface is located in the glove com‐ partment.

With telephone: overview

2.

Push the cargo cover upwards, arrow 2, and remove it.

Cargo cover in the cargo area

The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ rest.

Cargo area

Cargo cover

Note

Do not deposit heavy objects

Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may pose a risk to occupants, such as during braking and evasive maneuvers.◀


The cargo cover is in two parts.

It can be removed and stowed under the cargo floor panel when transporting bulky items.

Push the cargo cover upwards, arrow 1, until it disengages from the catches and then pull it towards the front, arrow 2.

Stowing

1.

Lift the cargo floor panel.

2.

Place the tailgate window cargo cover in the section on the right and the other cover

160


Seite 161


in the section on the left under the cargo floor panel.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. The cargo covers must snap audibly into place on their respective holders.

Enlarging the trunk


The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest.

the rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–

20–40. The sides and the middle section can be folded down separately.

Hints

Danger of jamming

Before folding down the rear seat back‐ rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests when the middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐ jury or damage may result.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seat

When installing child restraint systems, make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ rest.◀

Ensure that the lock is securely engaged

When you fold back the backrest make sure that it locks in place. When this happens the red warning field on the seat disappears.

Otherwise transported cargo could shoot into the car's interior during braking or evasive ma‐ neuvers and endanger occupants.◀

Retract the head restraint if needed be‐ fore backrest is folded down

With folding head restraints, fold in the head restraints before folding down the rear seat backrests, or damage may result.◀

Using the middle safety belt

If the middle safety belt in the rear is used, the larger side of the backrest must be locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have a restraining effect.◀

Folding down the sides

The sides can be folded down from the front or from the trunk. The backrests fold forward au‐ tomatically.

Reach into the recess and pull forward.

161


Seite 162


Placing the rear seat backrest in the upright position

Or: pull the respective lever inside the trunk.

Folding down the middle section

Pull the lever and hold it, arrow. Adjust the backrest angle.

Reset to standard position

Pull the lever and hold it, arrow. Fold the back‐ rest all the way back and let it engage.

Reach into the recess and pull forward.

Loading position

Note

Rear seats in the loading position

Do not fold the rear seats down when in the loading position, as this would result in a safety risk. Place the rear seat backrest in the original position before folding the seat down.◀

The concept

To expand the cargo area, the rear seat back‐ rest can be moved into a vertical position.

The sides can be folded down separately to various angles of inclination.

162


Seite 163

Storage compartments Controls

Storage compartments



▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to

page 164 .

▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.

▷ Storage compartment in the rear center console, refer to page

165 .

▷ Storage compartment in the rear center

armrest, refer to page 165 .

Hints

No loose objects in the car's interior

Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐ rior without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants e.g., during braking and evasive maneuvers.◀

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐ board

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.

The mat materials could damage the dash‐ board.◀

Glove compartment

Front passenger side

Note

Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀

Opening

Storage compartments

The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior:

▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger

side, refer to page 163 .

▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer to page

164

.

▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage compartment, in front of the cupholders, refer to page

164

.

▷ Storage compartment in the front center armrest, refer to page

164 .

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing

Fold cover closed.

163


Seite 164

Controls Storage compartments

Locking

The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key. This prevents access to the glove compartment.

After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key.

Driver's side

Note

Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀

Opening

Front storage compartment

Raise the lid to open it.

Compartments in the doors

Do not stow any breakable objects

Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.

glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐ cident.◀

Pull the handle.

Closing

Fold cover closed.

Center armrest

Front

A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.

Opening

164

Fold the center armrest up.

Repositioning

Center armrest can be pushed forwards or backwards. It engages in the end positions.


Seite 165

Connection for an external audio device

An external audio device, e.g., an MP3 player, can be con‐ nected via the AUX-IN port or the USB audio interface in the center armrest.

Rear

The rear center armrest contains a storage compartment.

Opening


Unsuitable containers

Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.◀

Front

Rear

In the center armrest.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

Pull the cover up.

Storage compartment in the rear

A storage compartment is located in the center armrest.

Cupholders

Hints

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

To open: press the button.

To close: push both covers back in, one after the other.

Pushing back the covers

Push back the covers before folding up the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder could become damaged.◀

165


Seite 166

Controls Storage compartments

Clothes hooks

Do not obstruct view

When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's view.◀

No heavy objects

Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ neuvers.◀

The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐ dles in the rear.

Storage compartments in the cargo area

Net

Small objects can be stowed in the net on the right side.

Multi-function hook

A multi-function hook is located on each side of the trunk.

The multi-function hooks can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.

Lightweight objects only

Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shop‐ ping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Oth‐ erwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers.

Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.◀

Retaining strap

A retaining strap is available on the left side trim for fastening small objects.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, refer to page 174

, there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

There are also two movable lashing eyes on a rail system.

Storage compartment under the cargo floor panel

Maximum load

To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/

20 kg in the storage compartment under the cargo floor panel.◀

Fold up the cargo floor panel. The integrated gas pressure spring holds the cargo area floor panel in a raised position automatically for eas‐ ier loading. Press the cargo floor panel down‐ ward to close it.

Partitioning the compartment

The compartment can be divided using an at‐ tachable partition.

Cargo position of the rear seat backrest, rear seat backrest tilt

To enlarge the cargo area, move the rear seat backrest into the loading position, refer to page

162 .

166


Seite 167



167


Driving tips

This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.


Seite 170

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving



Breaking-in period


Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ other (break-in time).

The following instructions will help accomplish a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐ trol, refer to page

75 .

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:

▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first

200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐ formance between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐ riod.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be ob‐ served if any of the components above-men‐ tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Drive with the tailgate closed

Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ wise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐ fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ ter the vehicle interior.◀

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:

▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.

▷ Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust system

Hot exhaust system

High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system.

170


Seite 171

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐ sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐ erty damage.

Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is a danger of getting burned.◀

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ hicle

It is not recommended to use mobile phones, such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior without a direct connection to an external aer‐ ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐ ance that the radiation generated during trans‐ mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐ cle interior.◀

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning

When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through water

Observe water level and speed

Do not exceed the maximum water level and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐ mission may be damaged.◀

Drive though calm water only and only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to

3 mph/5 km/h.

Braking safely

Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ ard feature.

Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐ fort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

In certain braking situations, the perforated brake discs can cause functional problems.

However, this has no effect on the perform‐ ance and operational reliability of the brake.

Objects within the range of movement of the pedals

No objects in the area around the pedals

Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident.

Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects.

Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀

171


Seite 172

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, press brake pedal ever so gently every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.

The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads.

In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills

Avoid stressing the brakes

Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutral

Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.

In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐ available with the engine stopped.◀

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐ wise the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Brake disc corrosion

Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the brake pads are favored by:

▷ Low mileage.

▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.

▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.

Corrosion will built up when the maximum pressure applied to the brake pads during braking is not reached - thus discs don't get cleaned.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐ sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicle

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops collecting under‐ neath the vehicle.

These traces of water under the vehicle are normal.

172


Seite 173

Loading Driving tips

Loading



vehicle and unstable driving situations may result.

Hints

Overloading the vehicle

To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐ pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.

Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐ creases the rate at which damage develops in‐ side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.◀

No fluids in the cargo area

Make sure that fluids do not leak into the cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ aged.◀

Heavy and hard objects

Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐ erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐ pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀

2.

Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3.

Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or

YYY pounds.

4.

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ pacity.

For example, if the YYY amount equals

1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =

400 lbs.

5.

Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Determining the load limit

1.

Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard:

▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the

173


Seite 174

Load

Driving tips Loading

Securing cargo

Lashing eyes in the trunk

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Lashing eyes in the trunk with rails

Stowing cargo

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.

▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.

▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo.

▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

To secure the cargo there are four movable lashing eyes in the cargo area.

174

To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐ row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at the new position.

The lashing eyes at the openings in the rails can be removed.


Seite 175

Loading Driving tips

Securing cargo

Securing cargo

Stow and secure the cargo as described; otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐ pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀

▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps or draw straps.

▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps.

Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

Note

Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing

Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Roof drip rail with flaps

fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐ sponse.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.

▷ The roof load should not extend past the loading area.

▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.

▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps.

▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate.

▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

The anchorage points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors.

Fold the cover outward.

Loading

Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐


175

Seite 176

Driving tips Saving fuel

Saving fuel



Close the windows and glass sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and thereby reduces the range.


Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ sions.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ ferent factors.

Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ erate driving style and regular maintenance, can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ ronmental impact.

Tires


Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐ sumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Drive away immediately

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

This is the quickest way of warming the cold engine up to operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ cle driving ahead of you.

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.

176


Seite 177

Saving fuel Driving tips

Avoid high engine speeds

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐ gine speeds.

When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ stant speed.

If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of

the vehicle, refer to page 84 .

road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range, especially in city and stopand-go traffic.

Reel off these functions if they are not needed.

The ECO PRO driving program supports the energy conserving use of comfort features.

These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely.

Use coasting

When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐ erator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Have maintenance carried out

Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life.

The maintenance should be carried out by your service center.

Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer to page

208 .

Switch off the engine during longer stops

Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ onds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ mined by other factors, such as driving style,

ECO PRO

The concept

ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐ mate control output, are adjusted.

Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐ matically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐ tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐ duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position

D remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐ sumption driving style.

177


Seite 178


The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.

Overview

The system includes the following

EfficientDynamics functions and displays:

▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page

178

.

▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to

page 179

▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to

page 178

.

▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to

page 180

.

▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to

page 181

.

Activate ECO PRO

cluster.

Press button repeatedly until ECO

PRO is displayed in the instrument

Configuring ECO PRO

Via the Driving Dynamics Control

1.

Activate ECO PRO.

2.

"Configure ECO PRO"

3.

Configure the program.

Via the iDrive

1.

"Settings"

2.

"ECO PRO mode"

Or

1.

"Settings"

2.

"Driving mode"

3.

"Configure ECO PRO"

Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip

▷ "Tip at:":

Adjust the ECO PRO speed.

▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":

The output is reduced once the set ECO

PRO speed is reached.

Coasting

Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐ ing the engine and Coasting, refer to page

180 , with the engine idling.

This function is only available in ECO PRO mode.

ECO PRO climate control

"ECO PRO climate control"

Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption can be economized.

The mirror heating is made available when out‐ side temperatures are very cold.

ECO PRO potential

Shows potential savings with the current set‐ tings in percentages.


ECO PRO bonus range

An adjusted driving style helps you extend your driving range.

This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range display.

The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.

178


Seite 179


Efficiency display

Display in the instrument cluster

ECO PRO tip, driving tip

The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance.

Display in the instrument cluster with extended range

A mark in the efficiency display informs about the current driving style.

Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐ celerating.

Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the bar's color:

▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the blue range.

▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal.

The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving are met.

Note

The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated.

Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:

1.

"Settings"

2.


3.

"ECO PRO Info"

ECO PRO tip, symbols

An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.

Symbol Measure

For efficient driving back off the ac‐ celerator or delay accelerating to al‐ low time to assess road conditions.

Reduce speed to the selected ECO

PRO speed.

Steptronic transmission: shift from

M/S to D.

Indications on the Control Display

EfficientDynamics

Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ ogy can be displayed while driving.

1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"EfficientDynamics"

Displaying fuel consumption history

The average fuel consumption can be dis‐ played within an adjustable time frame.

179


Seite 180


Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ lected time frame.

Trip interruptions are represented below the bar on the time axis.

"Consumption history"

Adjusting fuel consumption history time frame

Select the symbol.

Resetting fuel consumption history

1.

Open "Options".

2.

"Reset consumption history"

Displaying EfficientDynamics info

The current efficiency can be displayed.

"EfficientDynamics info"

The following systems are displayed:

▷ Auto Start/Stop function.

▷ Energy recovery.

▷ Climate control output.

▷ Coasting.

Display ECO PRO tips

"ECO PRO Tips"


Coasting

The concept

The system helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ sion when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ ing.

As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐ tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.

Hints

Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐

fer to page 177 , driving mode.

Coasting is automatically activated when ECO

PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics

Control.

The function is available in a certain speed range.

A proactively driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and sup‐ ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.

Safety mode

The function is not available under one of the following conditions.

▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.

▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades.

▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐ sive current.

▷ Cruise control activated.


In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐ prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are met:

▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.

▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ tion D.

▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

The driving status Coast can be influenced with the shift paddles.

180


Seite 181

Display



Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting.

The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ ometer approximately indicates idle speed.

The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting.

Display in the instrument cluster with extended range

The mark in the efficiency dis‐ play below the tachometer is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tachometer approximately indicates idle speed.

The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting.

Indications on the Control Display

The Coasting driving condition is displayed in

EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode is active.

The distance traveled in the Coasting driving condition is indicated by a counter.

Displaying EfficientDynamics info

1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"EfficientDynamics"

3.

"EfficientDynamics info"

Deactivating the system manually

The function can be deactivated in the Config‐ ure ECO PRO, refer to page

178

, menu, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐ eling downhill.


ECO PRO driving style analysis

The concept

In this situation the system helps develop an especially efficient driving style and to con‐ serve fuel.

For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.

The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display.

Using this indication, the individual driving style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.

The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.

The range of the vehicle can be extended by an efficient driving style.

This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the

Control Display.

181


Seite 182



The function is only available in ECO PRO mode.

Calling up ECO PRO driving style analysis

1.

Activate ECO PRO.

2.

"EfficientDynamics"

3.

Select the symbol.


The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐ ysis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup table.

The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐ ing style. The more efficient the driving style, the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐ row 1.

The table of values contains stars. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐ cluded in the table and the faster the bonus range increases, arrow 2.

If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of stars is displayed.

To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO

PRO tips are displayed during driving.

Tips about the energy saving driving style,

Conserving fuel, refer to page 176

.

182


Seite 183



183


Mobility

In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside

Assistance in the following.


Seite 186

Mobility Refueling

Refueling



2.

Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.

3.

Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Hints

Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to

page 188

, prior to refueling.

Refuel promptly

Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.◀

Fuel lid

Opening

1.

Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap.

Closing

1.

Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

2.

Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap

Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g.

The release is located in the trunk.

1.

Open the cover on the right side trim. To do this, push up the net and lift and remove

186


Seite 187 the cover using the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Refueling Mobility

2.

Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when refueling

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank

Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐ ment and damaging the vehicle.◀

Handling fuels

Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀


187

Seite 188

Mobility Fuel

Fuel



Fuel recommendation

Note

General fuel quality

Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐ gine problems, for instance poor engine startup behavior, poor handling and/or poor performance. Switch gas stations or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀

Gasoline

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ tent.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ taining metal must not be used.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ out metallic additives.

Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, as this can cause permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other compo‐ nents.◀

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of

10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.

Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards:

US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐ age of ethanol

Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐ centage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise this could damage the engine and fuel supply system.◀

Recommended fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel grade

Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐ formance.◀

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures.

This has no effect on the engine life.

Fuel quality

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐

188


Seite 189 gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ tenance.◀

Fuel Mobility


189

Seite 190

Mobility Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires



Tire inflation pressure

Safety information

The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ sure influence the following:

▷ The service life of the tires.

▷ Road safety.

▷ Driving comfort.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ serve this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.◀

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐ flation pressure.

Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐ tion pressure increases along with the tire's temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐ fications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours.

The displays of inflation devices may underread by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar.

For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire

Monitor.

For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure

Monitor.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page

191 , contains all tire inflation pressure

specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center.

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following:

▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.

▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to

100 mph/160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer

to page 191

, and adjust as necessary.

190


Seite 191

Wheels and tires Mobility

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Maximum permissible speed

Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀

Tire inflation pressure values up to

100 mph/160 km/h

328i, 328i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S A/S RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

225/50 R 18 95 V

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL RSC

225/45 R 19 96 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

2.2 / 32

2.2 / 32

2.2 / 32

2.2 / 32

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

Tire size

Front: 225/50 R 18

95 V

Rear: 255/45 R 18

99 V

Front: 225/45 R 19

92 W RSC

Rear: 255/40 R 19

96 W RSC

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

M

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

2.2 / 32

-

-

2.2 / 32

2.2 / 32

-

-

2.4 / 35

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

335i xDrive

Tire size



225/50 R 18 95 V

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

225/45 R 19 96 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

Front: 225/50 R 18

95 V

Rear: 255/45 R 18

99 V

2.2 / 32

2.2 / 32

2.2 / 32

-

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

-

2.2 / 32

191


Seite 192


Tire size

Front: 225/45 R 19

92 W RSC

Rear: 255/40 R 19

96 W RSC

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

M


2.2 / 32

-

-

2.4 / 35


50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

Tire inflation pressures at max.

speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀

Tire inflation pressure values over

100 mph/160 km/h

328i, 328i xDrive

Without high-speed tuning feature



Tire size

225/50 R 18 95 V

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL RSC

225/45 R 19 96 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

Front: 225/50 R 18

95 V

Rear: 255/45 R 18

99 V

Front: 225/45 R 19

92 W RSC

Rear: 255/40 R 19

96 W RSC

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

M


2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

2.4 / 35

2.2 / 32

-

2.4 / 35

-

2.9 /42

-

2.4 / 35

-

2.6 / 38


50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature



225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S A/S RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

225/55 R 17 97 W

RSC

225/50 R 18 95 W

RSC

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

2.9 /42

3.1 / 45

192


Seite 193


Tire size

Front: 225/50 R 18

95 W RSC

Rear: 255/45 R 18

99 W RSC

Front: 225/45 R 19

92 W RSC

Rear: 255/40 R 19

96 W RSC


2.6 / 38

-

2.8 / 41

-

-

2.9 /42

-

3.1 / 45

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

M


50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

335i xDrive

Without high-speed tuning feature



Tire size

Front: 225/45 R 19

92 W RSC

Rear: 255/40 R 19

96 W RSC

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

M


2.4 / 35

-

-

2.6 / 38


50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature



225/50 R 18 95 V

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL RSC

225/55 R 17 97H M

+S RSC

2.2 / 32

2.4 / 35 225/45 R 19 96 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

Front: 225/50 R 18

95 V

Rear: 255/45 R 18

99 V

2.2 / 32

-

2.6 / 38

2.9 /42

-

2.4 / 35

225/50 R 18 95 W

RSC

225/50 R 18 99 V

M+S XL RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

2.6 / 38

2.2 / 32

3.1 / 45

2.6 / 38

Front: 225/50 R 18

95 W RSC

Rear: 255/45 R 18

99 W RSC

2.6 / 38

-

Front: 225/45 R 19

92 W RSC

Rear: 255/40 R 19

96 W RSC

2.8 / 41

-

-

2.9 /42

-

3.1 / 45

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

M


50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

193


Seite 194


Tire identification marks

Tire size

245/45 R 18 96 Y

245: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

18: rim diameter in inches

96: load rating, not for ZR tires

Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter

Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h

R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h

S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h

T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design

0115: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the

1st week of 2015.

Recommendation

Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;

Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ ing habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

194


Seite 195


Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band

A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ quired by law.

Temperature grade for this tire

The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than

0.16 in/4 mm.

Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with

TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

RSC – Run-flat tires

Run-flat tires, refer to page 197 , are labeled

with a circular symbol containing the letters

RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than

0.12 in/3 mm.

There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Tire damage


Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Hints

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ fects:

▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.

195


Seite 196


▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things.

In case of tire damage

If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the rims and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident.

Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐ ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐ come life threatening for vehicle occupants and also other traffic.◀

Repair of tire damage

For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀

Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires

You should only use wheels and tires that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐ facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g., despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to chassis contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents

The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot guarantee the operating safety of the vehicle.◀

Recommended tire brands

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting

Information on mounting tires

Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center.

If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combination

You can ask the service center about the right wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as

ABS or DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ figuration from a single manufacturer.

196

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first

200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires.


Seite 197


Retreaded tires

Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.◀

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐ vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires

Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐ age and accidents can occur.◀

Run-flat tires

If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. Your service center will be glad to advise you. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct if needed.

Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐ cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires

Label

RSC label on the tire sidewall.

The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ cial rims.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire.

Changing run-flat tires

For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.

Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Mobility System

The concept

With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped

197


Seite 198


into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.

The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Hints

▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐ lity System found on the compressor and sealant container.

▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx.

1/8 in/4 mm or more.

▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable.

▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire.

▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel.

▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportu‐ nity and have them replaced if needed.

Enclosed areas

Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

Storage

The Mobility System is located under the cargo floor panel.

Sealing container

▷ Sealing container, arrow 1.

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

1 On/off reel

2 Holder for bottle

3 Reduce inflation pressure

4 Inflation pressure dial

5 Compressor

6 Connector/cable for socket

7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom of the compressor

198


Seite 199

Filling the tire with sealant

1.

Shake the sealing container.


4.

Slide the sealing container upright into the holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ ing that it engages audibly.

2.

Take the connection hose completely out of the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.

5.

Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve of the defective wheel.

3.

Attach the connection hose to the connec‐ tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it engages audibly.

6.

With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ hicle.


199

Seite 200


7.

With the ignition turned on or the engine running, reel on the compressor.

Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐ nutes

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than

10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.◀

Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐ nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at this point.

If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not reached:

1.

Switch off the compressor.

2.

Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.

3.

Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐ tribute the sealant in the tire.

4.

Inflate the tire again using the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your service center.

Stowing the Mobility System

1.

Remove the connection hose of the seal‐ ant container from the wheel.

2.

Remove the connection hose from the sealant container.

3.

Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ nection hose in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

4.

Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ cle.

Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐ sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.


If possible, do not drive at speeds less than

12 mph/20 km/h.

To correct the tire inflation pressure

1.

Stop at a suitable location.

2.

Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve stem.

3.

Attach the connection hose directly to the compressor.

200


Seite 201


4.

Insert the connector into a power socket inside the vehicle.

5.

Correct the tire inflation pressure to

2.5 bar.

▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition turned on or the engine running, reel on the compressor.

▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ ton on the compressor.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐ tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐ ble.

▷ 225/50 R 18.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions.

Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly activate

Dynamic Traction Control if needed.

Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Snow chains

Fine-link snow chains

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.

Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center.

Use

Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:

▷ 225/55 R 17.

201


Seite 202

Mobility Engine compartment

Engine compartment



Important features in the engine compartment

1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Washer fluid reservoir

4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal

5 Engine compartment fuse box

6 Oil filler neck

7 Coolant reservoir

The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and diesel engines is located on the opposite side of the engine compartment.

202


Seite 203

Engine compartment Mobility

Hood

Hints

Working in the engine compartment

Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center.

If work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀

Never reach into the engine compart‐ ment

Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀

Fold down wiper arm

Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms are against the windshield, or this may result in damage.◀

Opening the hood

1.

Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked


When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Hood open when driving

If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ mediately and close it securely.◀

Danger of jamming

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.

The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

2.

After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2.

Hood can be opened.


203

Seite 204

Mobility Engine oil

Engine oil




The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions.

The engine oil consumption can increase in case of, for example:

▷ Sporty driving.

▷ Break-in the engine.

▷ Idling of the engine.

▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling.

The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil measurement.

The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ uring principles:

▷ Status display

▷ Detailed measurement

If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements

A current measured value is available after ap‐ prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

With frequent short-distance trips, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the engine oil level


1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

"Engine oil level"

Engine oil level display messages

Different messages appear on the display de‐ pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to these messages.

If the engine oil level is too low, within the next

125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to page

205 .

Engine oil level too low

Add engine oil immediately; otherwise, an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐ sult in engine damage.◀

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Too much engine oil

Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐ gine damage.◀

Electronic oil measurement

Status display

The concept

The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐ play.

204


Seite 205

Engine oil Mobility

Detailed measurement

The concept

In the detailed measurement the engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Gasoline engine:

If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed.

Diesel engine:

During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ creased somewhat.


A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines.

Requirements

▷ Vehicle is on level road.

▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelera‐ tor pedal not depressed.

▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ perature.

Performing a detailed measurement

In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level:

1.

"Vehicle info"

2.

"Vehicle status"

3.

"Measure engine oil level"

4.

"Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Time: approx. 1 minute.

Adding engine oil


Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐ cle before engine oil is added.

Oil filler neck

Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message dis‐ played in the instrument cluster.

Adding engine oil

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀

Do not add too much engine oil

When too much engine oil is added, im‐ mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀

Protect children

Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐ ers to prevent health risks.◀

Engine oil types to add

Hints

No oil additives age.◀

Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐

Viscosity grades for engine oils

When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀

205


Seite 206

Mobility Engine oil

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Suitable engine oil types

You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐ ing oil rating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Further information regarding the oil specifica‐ tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐ quired with the service center.

Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐ gine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

Gasoline engine

API SM or superior oil rating.

Engine oil change:

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the service center change the motor oil.

206


Seite 207

Coolant Mobility

Coolant



The marks are on the side of the coolant reservoir.

Symbol Meaning

Maximum

Minimum

Hints

Danger of burns from hot engine

Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant may cause burns.◀

Suitable additives

Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about the suitable additives are available from the service center.

Adding

1.

Let the engine cool.

2.

Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

3.

If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

4.

Turn the lid until there is an audible click.

The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the lid must point towards one another.

5.

Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated as soon as possible.

Coolant level


Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ ant reservoir is located on the right side or the left side of the engine compartment.

Checking

1.

Let the engine cool.

2.

The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ tween the minimum and maximum marks.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environmen‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐ ing of coolant and coolant additives.

207


Seite 208

Mobility Maintenance

Maintenance



BMW maintenance system

The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ erational reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases scopes and intervals may vary according to the country-specific version. Re‐ placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ rately. Additional information is available from the service center.

Service data in the remote control

Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control.

Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle.

Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ mote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ count.

If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if needed, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter.

Condition Based Service

CBS

Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ count the driving conditions of your vehicle.

Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ nizes the maintenance requirements.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

Detailed information on service requirements,

refer to page 83

, can be displayed on the Con‐ trol Display.

Service and Warranty

Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models

Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els for additional information on service re‐ quirements.

Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ nance.

208


Seite 209

Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis

Note

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis

The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a work‐ shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.◀

Position

Maintenance Mobility

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle's emissions.

Emissions

▷ The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ riod can seriously damage emission con‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic converter.


209

Seite 210

Mobility Replacing components

Replacing components



3.

Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

4.

Remove the wiper blade forward from the catch.

5.

Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place.

6.

Fold down the wipers.

Folding down wipers before opening the hood

Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are against the windshield to prevent damage.◀

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located behind the left folding cover in the trunk.

Wiper blade replacement

Note

Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.◀

Replacing the wiper blades

1.

To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer

to page 71

, the wiper arms.

2.

Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

Lamp and bulb replacement

Hints

Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ tion to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar those or if they have not been described here.

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.

210


Seite 211

Replacing components Mobility

Danger of burns

Only change bulbs when they are cool; otherwise, there is a danger of getting burned.◀

Working on the lighting system

When working on the lighting system, you should always reel off the lights affected to prevent short circuits.

To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlights

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀

Do not touch the bulbs

Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life.

Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source.

These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers

Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden‐ sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ light glass does not need to be changed.

If the headlights do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this.

Headlight setting

The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐ lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐ ice after a replacement.

Front lights, bulb replacement

Halogen headlights

Headlights

1 Parking lights

2 High beams/headlight flasher

3 Low beams

4 Turn signal

5 Daytime running lights

Accessing the turn signals and low beams

Follow general instructions, refer to page 210

.

211


Seite 212


Low beams

55-watt bulb, H7.

1.

Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.

In the wheel house, loosen the two brackets and remove the cover.

Turn signal

24-watt bulb, PY24W

1.

If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove.

2.

Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it from the holder and remove.

2.

Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

3.

Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal.

4.

Attach the cover to the wheel house.

3.

Pull the connector off the bulb.

4.

Attach the connector to the new bulb.

5.

First insert the bulb at the top with the strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into place.

212

6.

Close the headlight housing with the lid.

Make sure that the lid engages.

7.



Seite 213


Accessing the daytime running lights, high beams/headlight flasher and parking lights

Follow general instructions, refer to page

210 .

1.

Open the hood, refer to page

203 .

2.

Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.

High beams/headlight flasher

55-watt bulb, H7.

1.

Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it from the holder and remove.

Parking lights

6-watt bulb, H6W.

1.

Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove.

2.

Pull the connector off the bulb.

3.

Attach the connector to the new bulb.

4.

First insert the bulb at the top with the strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly, arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into place.

2.


3.

To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed in reverse order of removal. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place.

4.



5.




213

Seite 214


Daytime running lights

24-watt bulb, PW24W.

1.

If necessary, remove the high beam bulb connector.

2.

Remove the bulb holder.

Headlights

3.

Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

4.

To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐ tom of the bulb holder must be facing downward. Make sure that the bulb holder snaps into place.

5.

Attach the high beam bulb connector.

6.



Xenon headlights

Xenon headlights

Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lights on and off frequently shortens their life.

If a bulb fails, reel on the front fog lights and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlights

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is a danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.

1 Parking lights / daytime running lights

2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher

3 Turn signal

Low beams and high beams are designed with xenon technology.

The parking lights and daylight running lights are made using LED technology.

Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Turn signal


.

214


Seite 215

21-watt bulb, PY21W

1.

In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ ets and remove the cover.


Carefully pull back the wheel house panel, arrow 2.

2.

If necessary, pull the inside trim of the wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

2.

Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.

Turn the bulb, arrow 2.

Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise.

Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐ wise.

Remove the bulb.

3.


4.

Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ verse order of removal.

5.




210 .

35-watt bulb, H8.

1.

Use the handle of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.

3.

Insert the new bulb, connect the connector and screw on the wheel house panel.

Turn signal in exterior mirror


.

The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature

LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.


215

Seite 216


Tail lights, bulb replacement

At a glance

Removing the exterior tail lamp

1.

Open the tailgate.

2.

Use a screwdriver out of the onboard vehi‐ cle tool kit to depress the catch fittings, ar‐ rows, and take off the cover.

1 Turn signal

2 Reversing lamp

3 Inside brake lamp

4 Tail lights

5 Outside brake lamp

3.

Loosen the two nuts with the screwdriver handle, arrows.

Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights



210 .

Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.

Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W.

The tail lights feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunc‐ tion.

Use caution when replacing the bulb

Use caution and proceed one step at a time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐ age to the tail lights or the vehicle.◀

4.

Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp, ar‐ row 1, and carefully pull it backward and out, arrow 2. Use your free hand to hold it in place in order to prevent the tail lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make sure

216


Seite 217 that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the centering pin.


arrow 2. Make sure that the tail lamp en‐ gages in the rubber mount.

5.

Release the catch at the top on the con‐ nector of the connecting line and remove the connector from the bulb holder.

Replacing the bulbs

1.

Loosen the three fasteners, arrows 1, on the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp, arrow 2.

4.

Screw the two nuts tight and mount the cover.

Lights in the tailgate



.

Reversing lights: 16-watt bulb, PW16W.

Inner brake lights: 21-watt bulb, H21W

Accessing the lights

2.

Press the defective bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

3.

Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐ teners.

Installing the tail lamp

1.

Connect the connecting line to the tail lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip.

2.

Make sure that the sealing ring is on the centering pin and that it is not damaged.

3.

Position and firmly press the outer part of the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐ row 1, and the inner part onto the screws,

Slide the cover outwards, arrow, and remove.

217


Seite 218


Replacing the reversing lamp and inner brake lamp

1.

Loosen the two holders, arrow 1 and pull down on the lamp holder to remove, ar‐ row 2.

Changing wheels

Hints

When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.

Which is why no spare tire is available.

The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

2.

Unscrew the defective bulb of the revers‐ ing or brake lamp from its socket counter‐ clockwise.

3.

Insert the new bulb.

Installing the bulb holder

1.

Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐ row 2, into the connections, arrow 3.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ cated at the positions shown.

2.

Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that the two exterior holders latch into place.

3.

Place the cover back in position and slide it inwards.

Rear lamp, license plate lamp and central brake lamp


210 .

These lights are made using LED technology.

Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Vehicle battery

Maintenance

The battery is maintenance-free.

The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery.

Further information about the battery can be obtained from your service center.

Battery replacement

Use approved vehicle batteries only

Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ ble.◀

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by the service center

218


Seite 219


to ensure that all comfort features are fully available and that any Check Control mes‐ sages of these comfort features are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery


Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.

The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ lowing cases:

▷ When making frequent short-distance drives.

▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ riods, longer than a month.

Hints

Do not connect charging devices to the

12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption.◀

Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page

223 , in the

engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure

After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐ tings updated, e. g.:

▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐ tions again.

▷ Time: update.

▷ Date: update.

▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to page

50 .

Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy‐ cling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Hints

Replacing fuses

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀

Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the trunk.

In the engine compartment

1.

Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen the three cover screws, arrow 1.

2.

Pull up the holder, arrow 2.

219


Seite 220


3.

Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.

4.

Press the four fasteners and remove the cover.

Attaching the covers

1.

When attaching the cover, make sure that all four fasteners are engaged.

2.

Attach the cover under the rubber lip and then thread it between the bars.

The fuses are located under a cover. To open the cover, reach into the recessed grip on the side and fold the cover open.

Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.

After initial use, insert the sheet in the holding fixture on the inside of the cover.

3.

Press down on the holder and tighten the three screws.

In the trunk

Fold up the cargo floor panel.

220


Seite 221

Breakdown assistance Mobility

Breakdown assistance



Hints

Emergency Request not guaranteed

For technical reasons, the Emergency

Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐ able conditions.◀

Overview

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located in the center console.

Intelligent Emergency

Request

The concept

In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ quest can be made through this system.


Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

SOS button in the roofliner

Requirements

▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated.

▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.

▷ The Assist system is functional.

Initiating an Emergency Request

1.

Press the cover briefly to open it.

2.

Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green.

▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency

Request was initiated.

If a cancel prompt appears on the display, the Emergency Request can be aborted.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished.

▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been established.

221


Seite 222

Mobility Breakdown assistance

When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center, the BMW

Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the

BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum‐ stances.

For this, data are transmitted to the BMW

Response Center which serve to deter‐ mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.

the current position of the vehicle, if it can be established.

▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW

Response Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard at the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically

Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

First aid kit

Note

Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage

The first aid kit is located behind the left-hand cover in the trunk.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.

To open the catches, arrows, turn through 90°.

Fold back the trim.

Jump-starting


If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles.

Hints

Do not touch live parts

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐ jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.◀

To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ dure.

222


Seite 223


Preparation

Bodywork contact between vehicles

Make sure that there is no contact be‐ tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀

1.

Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ mation can be found on the battery.

2.

Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ cle.

3.

Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

Connecting order

Connect the jumper cables in the correct order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀

The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ tive terminal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

Connecting the cables

1.

Open the cover of the BMW starting aid terminal.

2.

Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ tance.

3.

Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4.

Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.

5.

Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.


Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1.

Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ creased idle speed.

2.

Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not success‐ ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐ other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ charged battery to recharge.

3.

Let both engines run for several minutes.

4.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ verse order.

Check the battery and recharge if needed.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal.


223

Seite 224

Mobility Breakdown assistance

Tow-starting and towing

Note




Steptronic transmission: transporting your vehicle

Note

Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towed

Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ cur.◀

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Do not lift the vehicle

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀

Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐ sitioning the vehicle.

Towing other vehicles

Hints

Light towing vehicle

The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ sponse.◀

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly

Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.◀

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ pending on local regulations.

▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ dow.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following:

▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.

▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ ried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

224


Seite 225

The tow fitting is located in the onboard vehi‐ cle tool kit which is stored in a storage com‐ partment on the left side in the trunk. Open the cover.

Tow fitting, information on use

▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.

▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.

▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.◀

Screw thread for tow fitting


Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting


Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission.


225

Seite 226

Mobility Care

Care



Car washes


Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ age the vehicle.

Hints

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of

140 ℉/60 ℃.

If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐ tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐ sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage.

Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.◀

Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with high-pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors and camera lenses on the outside of the vehicle for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀

Automatic car washes

Hints

Do not use high pressure washing sys‐ tems

With washing systems operating at high pres‐ sures and nozzle positions close to the win‐ dows, drops of water can penetrate.◀

▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.

▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms.

▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

▷ Retract the rear spoiler.

▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page

71

, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐ vation.

▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐ tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page

47 .

Guide rails in car washes

Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.◀

226


Seite 227

Care Mobility

Before driving into a car wash

In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps:

Steptronic transmission:

1.

Drive into the car wash.

2.

Engage selector lever position N.

3.

Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ played.

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐ gaged and damages can result.◀

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ sion:

1.


2.


Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ ping on the brake turns the ignition off.

Selector lever position

Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally:

▷ When the ignition is switched off.

▷ After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlights

▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleansers.

▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur.

Completely remove all residues on the win‐ dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Car care products

BMW recommends using care and cleaning products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products

Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows.

Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ cles.

Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.◀

Vehicle paint

Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ quency and extent of your car care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ tered or discolored.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

227


Seite 228

Mobility Care

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Suitable care products are available from the service center.

Upholstery material care

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro® fasteners

Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.

Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ turer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rear spoiler compartment

To ensure that the function of the rear spoiler is not impaired, by leaves, snow or ice e.g., the compartment that accommodates the rear spoiler should be cleaned regularly.

Rubber components

Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers.

When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

These include:

▷ Imitation leather surfaces.

▷ Roofliner.

▷ Lamp lenses.

▷ Instrument cluster cover.

▷ Matt black spray-coated components.

▷ Painted parts in the interior.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen cloth lightly with water.

Do not soak the roofliner.

No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ vents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty

228


Seite 229

Care Mobility

grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.◀

Safety belts

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaning

Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.◀

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

No objects in the area around the pedals

Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident.

Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects.

Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, e.g.◀

Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐ rior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.

To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/monitors

Cleaning displays and screens

Do not use any chemical or household cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐ fected.◀

Keeping out moisture

Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit; otherwise, electrical components can be damaged.◀

Avoid pressure

Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.◀

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long-term

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Additional information is available from the service center.

229



Reference

This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need.


Seite 232

Reference Technical data

Technical data



Note

The technical data and specifications in this

Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.

The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed values can be found in the approval documents, on informa‐ tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained from the service center.

The information in the vehicle documents al‐ ways has priority.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

BMW 3 Series Gran Turismo

Width with mirrors

Width without mirrors

Height

Length

Wheelbase

Smallest turning radius diam.

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ment, tires, load and chassis version.

inches/mm inches/mm inches/mm inches/mm inches/mm ft/m

80.6/2,047

72.0/1,828

59.4/1,508

190.0/4,827

115.0/2,921

38.7–40.4/11.8–12.3

232


Seite 233

Weights

328i

Approved gross vehicle weight

Load

Approved front axle load

Approved rear axle load

Approved roof load capacity

Cargo area capacity

328i xDrive


Load




Cargo area capacity

335i xDrive


Load




Cargo area capacity

Technical data Reference

lbs/kg lbs/kg lbs/kg lbs/kg lbs/kg cu ft/liters

4,770/2,164

920/417

2,095/950

2,775/1,259

165/75

24.6–56.8/520–1,600 lbs/kg lbs/kg lbs/kg lbs/kg lbs/kg cu ft/liters

4,915/2,229

920/417

2,260/1,025

2,785/1,263

165/75

24.6–56.8/520–1,600 lbs/kg lbs/kg lbs/kg lbs/kg lbs/kg cu ft/liters

5,035/2,284

920/417

2,360/1,070

2,775/1,259

165/75

24.6–56.8/520–1,600


233

Seite 234

Reference Technical data

Capacities

Fuel tank, approx.

US gal/liters

Gasoline: 15.8/60

Notes

Fuel quality, refer to page

188

234


Seite 235

Technical data Reference


235

Seite 236

Reference Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 119

ACC, Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go

126

Acceleration Assistant, refer

to Launch Control 75

Accessories and parts

7

Activated-charcoal filter

152

Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion

116

Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go, ACC 126

Active rear spoiler

121

Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 118

Adaptive Light Control

93

Additives, oil 205

Adjustments, seats/head re‐

straints 51

After washing vehicle 227

Airbags

97

Airbags, indicator/warning light

98

Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated-air mode 148

, 151

Air, dehumidifying, refer to

Cooling function 148

,

151

Air distribution,

manual 148 ,

151

Air flow, air conditioner

148

Air flow, automatic climate control

151

Air pressure, tires 190

Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ tion

152

Alarm system

46

Alarm, unintentional 47

All around the center con‐ sole

16

All around the roofliner

17

All around the steering wheel

14

All-season tires, refer to Win‐ ter tires

197

All-wheel-drive

120

Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 155

Alternative oil types 206

Ambient light

96

Antifreeze, washer fluid 72

Antilock Brake System,

ABS

119

Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC

119

Approved axle load 233

Approved engine oils, see

Suitable engine oil types

206

Arrival time 87

Ash tray

158

Assistance when driving off

124

Assist system information, on

Control Display 90

Attentiveness assistant 118

AUTO intensity

150

Automatic car wash 226

Automatic climate con‐ trol

147

Automatic climate control with enhanced features

149

Automatic Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 126

Automatic Curb Monitor 58

Automatic deactivation, frontseat passenger airbags

99

Automatic headlight con‐ trol

93

Automatic locking

45

Automatic recirculated-air control

151

Automatic tailgate 40

Automatic transmission, see

Steptronic transmission 72

AUTO program, automatic cli‐

mate control 150

AUTO program, climate con‐

trol 148

AUTO program, intensity

150

Auto Start/Stop function

67

Average fuel consumption

87

Average speed

87

Axle loads, weights

233

B

Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 53

Backrest, width 53

Band-aids, refer to First aid kit

222

Bar for tow-starting/

towing 224

Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 218

Battery replacement, vehicle

remote control 35

Battery, vehicle 218

Belts, safety belts

54

Beverage holder, cu‐

pholder 165

BMW Assist, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation

BMW Driver’s Guide App 6

BMW Homepage 6

BMW Internet page 6

BMW maintenance sys‐ tem

208

236


Seite 237

Everything from A to Z Reference

Bonus range, ECO PRO 178

Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐

pholders 165

Brake assistant

119

Brake discs, break-in 170

Brake force display 118

Brake lights, adaptive

118

Brake lights, brake force dis‐ play

118

Brake pads, break-in 170

Braking, hints 171

Breakdown assistance 221

Break-in 170

Brightness of Control Dis‐ play

90

Bulb replacement 210

Bulb replacement, front 211

Bulb replacement, halogen headlights

211

Bulb replacement, rear 216

Bulb replacement, xenon headlights

214

Bulbs and lights 210

Button, RES 129

Button, Start/Stop 65

Bypassing, refer to Jump-

starting 222

C

California Proposition 65

Warning

7

Camera lenses, care 229

Camera, rearview cam‐

era 137

Camera, Side View

140

Camera, Top View 141

Can holder, refer to Cuphold‐

ers 165

Car battery 218

Car care products 227

Care, displays

229

Care, vehicle 227

Cargo 173

Cargo area 160

Cargo area, enlarging 161

Cargo area, storage compart‐

ments 166

Cargo cover

160

Cargo position, rear seat backrest

162

Cargo, securing 174

Cargo straps, securing cargo

174

Car key, refer to Remote con‐ trol

34

Carpet, care 229

Car wash

226

Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system

170

CBS Condition Based Serv‐ ice

208

CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation

Center armrest

164

Center console

16

Central locking system

40

Central screen, refer to Con‐

trol Display 18

Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 7

Changing parts

210

Changing wheels 218

Changing wheels/tires 196

Chassis number, see vehicle identification number

9

Check Control

78

Checking the engine oil level

electronically 204

Checking the oil level elec‐

tronically 204

Children, seating position

61

Children, transporting safely

61

Child restraint fixing sys‐

tem 61

Child restraint fixing system

LATCH

63

Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 61

Child safety locks

64

Child seat, mounting

61

Child seats 61

Chrome parts, care

228

Cigarette lighter

158

Cleaning displays

229

Climate control 147

, 149

Clock

82

Closing/opening via door

lock 39

Closing/opening with remote control

37

Closing the tailgate with no-

touch activation 43

Clothes hooks 166

Coasting 180

Coasting with engine decou‐

pled, coasting 180

Coasting with idling en‐

gine 180

Cockpit

14

Combination reel, refer to

Turn signals

69

Combination switch, refer to

Wiper system

70

Comfort Access

42

COMFORT program, Dy‐ namic Driving Control

124

Compartments in the doors

164

Compass 156

Compressor

197

Computer, refer to On-board

computer 86

Condensation on win‐

dows 152

Condensation under the vehi‐

cle 172

Condition Based Service

CBS 208

Configuring driving pro‐

gram 124

Confirmation signal 45

ConnectedDrive, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐

237


Seite 238


tertainment and Communi‐ cation

ConnectedDrive Services

Connecting electrical devi‐

ces 158


102 ,

105

Control Display 18

Control Display, settings 89

Controller 18

,

19

Control systems, driving sta‐

bility 119

Convenient opening with the

remote control 37

Coolant

207

Coolant level 207

Coolant temperature

82

Cooling function

148 ,

151

Cooling, maximum 150

Cooling system

207

Cornering light

93

Corrosion on brake discs 172

Cosmetic mirror

158

Courtesy lamps during un‐ locking

37

Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐

cle locked 38

Cruise control

132

Cruise control, active with

Stop & Go

126

Cruising range 82

Cupholders 165

Current fuel consumption

83

D

Damage, tires

195

Damping control, dy‐ namic

121

Data, technical 232

Date

82

Daytime running lights

93

Defrosting, refer to defrosting the windows

148

Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 152

Defrosting the windows 148

Dehumidifying, air

148 ,

151

Deleting personal data 25

Deletion of personal data 25

Destination distance

87

Digital clock 82

Digital compass

156

Dimensions

232

Dimmable exterior mirrors 59

Dimmable interior rearview

mirror 59

Direction indicator, refer to

Turn signals

69

Display, electronic, instru‐

ment cluster 77

Display in windshield 90

Display lighting, refer to In‐

strument lighting 95

Displays, cleaning 229

Disposal, coolant 207

Disposal, vehicle battery 219

Distance control, refer to

PDC

134

Distance to destination

87

Divided screen view, split screen

23

Door lock 39

Door lock, refer to Remote

control 34

Drive-off assistant

124

Drive-off assistant, refer to

DSC

119

Driver assistance, refer to In‐ telligent Safety

106

Driving Assistant, refer to In‐ telligent Safety

106

Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol

122

Driving instructions, breakin

170

Driving mode 122

Driving notes, general 170

Driving stability control sys‐ tems

119

Driving style analysis

181

Driving tips 170

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 119

DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 120

Dynamic Damping Con‐

trol 121

Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 119

Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 120

E

ECO PRO

177

ECO PRO, bonus range

178

ECO PRO display

177

ECO PRO driving mode 177

ECO PRO driving style analy‐

sis 181

ECO PRO mode 177

ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ struction

179

EfficientDynamics

179

Electronic displays, instru‐ ment cluster

77

Electronic oil measure‐

ment 204

Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC

119

Emergency detection, remote control

35

Emergency release, fuel filler

flap 186

Emergency Request 221

Emergency start function, en‐

gine start 35

Emergency unlocking, tail‐ gate

42

Emergency unlocking, trans‐ mission lock

75

Energy Control 83

Energy recovery 83

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function

67

Engine, automatic switch-

off 67

238


Seite 239


Engine compartment

202

Engine compartment, work‐

ing in 203

Engine coolant 207

Engine idling when driving, coasting

180

Engine oil

204

Engine oil, adding

205

Engine oil additives

205

Engine oil change

206

Engine oil filler neck 205

Engine oil temperature 81

Engine oil types, alterna‐ tive

206

Engine oil types, ap‐

proved 206

Engine start during malfunc‐

tion 35

Engine start, jump-start‐ ing

222

Engine start, refer to Starting the engine

66

Engine stop 66

Engine temperature 81

Entering a car wash 226

Equipment, interior

154

Error displays, see Check

Control 78

ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐

gram, refer to DSC 119

Exchanging wheels/tires 196

Exhaust system

170

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature

59

Exterior mirrors 58

External start 222

External temperature dis‐ play

82

External temperature warn‐ ing

82

Eyes for securing cargo 174

F

Failure message, see Check

Control 78

False alarm, refer to Uninten‐

tional alarm 47

Fan, refer to Air flow

148 ,

151

Filler neck for engine oil 205

Fine wood, care 228

First aid kit

222

Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ ting

224

Flat tire, changing wheels

218

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

104

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 100

Flat tire, warning

lamp 101 ,

104

Flooding 171

Floor carpet, care

229

Floor mats, care 229

Fogged up windows

148

Folding back rear seat back‐ rests

161

Fold-out position, wiper 71

Foot brake

171

Front airbags 97

Front-end collision warning with braking function

109

Front-end collision warning with City Braking func‐ tion

107

Front fog lights 95

Front fog lights, front, bulb re‐ placement

215

Front lights 211

front-seat passenger airbags,

automatic deactivation 99

Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator lamp

99

FTM Flat Tire Monitor

104

Fuel

188

Fuel consumption, current 83

Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consump‐ tion

87

Fuel filler flap 186

Fuel gauge

81

Fuel lid

186

Fuel quality

188

Fuel recommendation 188

Fuel, tank capacity

234

Fuse

219

G

Garage door opener, refer to

Universal Integrated Remote

Control

154

Gasoline 188

Gear change, Steptronic transmission

73

Gear shift indicator 84

General driving notes 170

Glare shield 158

Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐ amic glass sunroof

49

Glove compartment

163

Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ proved

233

H

Handbrake, refer to parking brake

68

Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 155

Hazard warning flashers

221

Head airbags 97

Headlight control, auto‐

matic 93

Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture 93

Headlight flasher

70

Headlight glass 211

Headlights 211

Headlights, care

227

Headlight washer system 70

Head restraints 51

Head restraints, front 55

Head restraints, rear 56

Head-up Display

90

Head-up Display, care

229

Heavy cargo, stowing 174

239


Seite 240


I

Height, vehicle 232

High-beam Assistant

94

High beams

70

High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam Assistant 94

Hills 172

Hill start assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant

124

Hints 6

Holder for beverages

165

Homepage

6

Hood 203

Horn 14

Hotel function, tailgate 42

Hot exhaust system 170

HUD Head-up Display 90

Hydroplaning 171

Ice warning, see External temperature warning

82

Icy roads, see External tem‐

perature warning 82

Identification marks, tires

194

Identification number, see ve‐ hicle identification num‐ ber

9

iDrive 18

Ignition key, refer to Remote control

34

Ignition off

65

Ignition on 65

Indication of a flat tire

101 ,

104

Indicator and alarm lamps,

see Check Control 78

Indicator lamp, see Check

Control 78

Individual air distribu‐ tion

148 ,

151

Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 35

Inflation pressure, tires 190

Inflation pressure warning

FTM, tires

104

Info display, refer to On-

Board computer

86

Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 101

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM

104

Instrument cluster

77

Instrument cluster, electronic displays

77

Instrument lighting 95

Integrated key 34

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

30

Intelligent Emergency Re‐

quest 221

Intelligent Safety

106

Intensity, AUTO pro‐

gram 150

Interior equipment

154

Interior lights

95

Interior lights during unlock‐

ing 37

Interior lights with the vehicle locked

38

Interior motion sensor 47

Interior rearview mirror, auto‐

matic dimming feature 59

Interior rearview mirror, com‐ pass

156

Interior rearview mirror, man‐

ually dimmable 59

Internet page 6

Interval display, service re‐

quirements 83

Interval mode

71

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

218

Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ sion

73

Jump-starting

222

K

Key/remote control

34

Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access

42

Key Memory, refer to Per‐

sonal Profile 35

Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ mission

73

Knee airbag

98

L

Lamp replacement 210

Lamp replacement, front 211

Lamp replacement, rear 216

Lane departure warning 114

Lane margin, warning

114

Language on Control Dis‐ play

89

Lashing eyes, securing cargo

174

LATCH child restraint sys‐ tem

63

Launch Control 75

Leather, care

227

LEDs, light-emitting di‐ odes

211

Length, vehicle

232

Letters and numbers, enter‐ ing

25

Light alloy wheels, care 228

Light control 93

Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs

211

Lighter

158

Lighting 92

Lights

92

Lights and bulbs

210

Light switch 92

Load

174

Loading

173

Loading position 162

Lock, door 39

Locking/unlocking via door lock

39

240


Seite 241


Locking/unlocking with re‐ mote control

37

Locking, automatic 45

Locking, settings 45

Lock, power window 48

Locks, doors, and win‐

dows 64

Low beams

92

Low beams, automatic, refer

to High-beam Assistant 94

Lower back support

53

Luggage rack, see Roofmounted luggage rack

175

Lumbar support

53

M

Maintenance 208

Maintenance require‐ ments

208

Maintenance, service require‐ ments

83

Maintenance system,

BMW

208

Make-up mirror

158

Malfunction displays, see

Check Control

78

Manual air distribu‐

tion 148

, 151

Manual air flow 148

,

151

Manual mode, Steptronic

transmission 74

Manual operation, door lock

39

Manual operation, exterior

mirrors 58

Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 186

Manual operation, Park Dis‐ tance Control PDC

135

Manual operation, rearview

camera 138

Manual operation, Side

View 140

Manual operation, Top

View 141

Marking on approved

tires 196

Marking, run-flat tires 197

Master key, refer to Remote

control 34

Maximum cooling

150

Maximum speed, display 84

Maximum speed, winter

tires 197

Measure, units of 90

Medical kit

222

Memory, seat, mirror

57

Menu, EfficientDynamics 179

Menu in instrument clus‐ ter

86

Menus, operating, iDrive 18

Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐

ing concept 20

Messages, see Check Con‐ trol

78

Microfilter 149

, 152

Minimum tread, tires

195

Mirror 58

Mirror memory 57

Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 171

Mobility System 197

Modifications, technical, refer to Safety

7

Moisture in headlight 211

Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐

play 18

Mounting of child restraint systems

61

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons

14

N

Navigation, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment and Communication

Neck restraints, front, refer to

Head restraints 55

Neck restraints, rear, refer to

Head restraints 56

Neutral cleaner, see wheel cleaner

228

New wheels and tires 196

Nylon rope for tow-starting/ towing

224

O

OBD Onboard Diagnosis

209

OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐

agnosis 209

Obstacle marking, rearview

camera 138

Octane rating, refer to Rec‐ ommended fuel grade

188

Odometer 82

Office, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication

Oil

204

Oil, adding

205

Oil additives

205

Oil change

206

Oil change interval, service requirements

83

Oil filler neck 205

Oil types, alternative

206

Oil types, approved 206

Old batteries, disposal 219

On-board computer 86

Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 18

Onboard vehicle tool kit

210

Opening/closing via door

lock 39

Opening and closing 34

Opening and closing, without remote control

39

Opening and closing, with re‐

mote control 37

Opening the tailgate with no-

touch activation 43

Operating concept, iDrive

18

Optional equipment, standard equipment

6

241


Seite 242


Outside air, refer to Auto‐ matic recirculated-air con‐ trol

151

Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature

82

P

Paint, vehicle 227

Panoramic glass sunroof 49

Parallel parking assistant 142

Park Distance Control

PDC

134

Parked-car ventilation 153

Parked vehicle, condensa‐ tion

172

Parking aid, refer to PDC 134

Parking assistant

142

Parking brake

68

Parking lights 92

Parts and accessories

7

Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 58

Pathway lines, rearview cam‐

era 138

PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol

134

Pedestrian warning with city braking function

112

Personal Profile

35

Personal Profile, exporting profiles

36

Personal Profile, importing profiles

37

Pinch protection system, glass sunroof

50

Pinch protection system, win‐ dows

48

Plastic, care 228

Power failure 219

Power windows

47

Pressure, tire air pres‐

sure 190

Pressure warning FTM,

tires 104

Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐

file 35

Programmable memory but‐

tons, iDrive 24

Protective function, glass sunroof

50

Protective function, win‐ dows

48

Push-and-turn switch, refer to

Controller 18 ,

19

R

Radiator fluid

207

Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control 34

Radio ready state 65

Radio, see user's manual for


Rain sensor 71

Rear lights

218

Rear seat backrest, adjust‐

ing 162

Rear seat backrest tilt

162

Rear socket 159

Rear spoiler, active

121

Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐

ment 216

Rearview camera 137

Rearview mirror 58

Rear window de‐ froster

148 ,

151

Recirculated-air filter 152

Recirculated-air mode

148 ,

151

Recommended fuel grade

188

Recommended tire brands

196

Refueling 186

Remaining range 82

Remote control/key

34

Remote control, malfunc‐

tion 38

Remote control, univer‐

sal 154

Replacement fuse

219

Replacing parts 210

Replacing wheels/tires 196

Reporting safety defects 9

RES button

129

RES button, see Active

Cruise Control, ACC 126

RES button, see Cruise con‐

trol 132

Reserve warning, refer to

Range

82

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM

101

Retaining straps, securing cargo

174

Retreaded tires

196

Roadside parking lights 93

RON recommended fuel

grade 188

Roofliner 17

Roof load lidacity

233

Roof-mounted luggage rack

175

Rope for tow-starting/

towing 224

RSC Run Flat System Com‐ ponent, refer to Run-flat

tires 197

Rubber components,

care 228

Run-flat tires

197

S

Safe braking 171

Safety

7

Safety belt reminder for driv‐ er's seat and front passen‐ ger seat

55

Safety belts 54

Safety belts, care

229

Safety switch, windows 48

Safety systems, airbags

97

Saving fuel

176

242


Seite 243


Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ play

18

Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐

hicle tool kit 210

Screw thread, see screw thread for tow fitting, screw

thread for tow fitting 225

Sealant 197

Seat and mirror memory

57

Seat belts, refer to Safety belts

54

Seat heating, front

54

Seat heating, rear

54

Seating position for chil‐ dren

61

Seats

51

Selection list in instrument cluster

86

Selector lever, Steptronic

transmission 73

Sensors, care 229

Service and warranty

8

Service requirements, Condi‐ tion Based Service

CBS 208

Service requirements, dis‐ play

83

Services, ConnectedDrive

Servotronic

125

SET button, see Active

Cruise Control, ACC 126

SET button, see Cruise con‐

trol 132

Settings, locking/unlock‐ ing

45

Settings on Control Dis‐ play

89

Settings, storing for seat, mir‐

ror 57

Shift paddles on the steering

wheel 74

Side airbags 97

Side View 139

Signaling, horn

14

Signals when unlocking 45

Sitting safely

51

Size

232

Slide/tilt glass roof 49

Smallest turning radius

232

Snow chains 201

Socket 158

Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ nostics

209

SOS button 221

Spare fuse

219

Specified engine oil types

206

Speed, average

87

Speed limit detection, onboard computer

87

Speed limiter, display 84

Speed Limit Information

84

Speed warning 88

Split screen 23

SPORT+ - program, Dynamic

Driving Control

123

Sport displays, torque dis‐ play, performance dis‐

play 88

SPORT program, Dynamic

Driving Control

123

Sport program, transmis‐ sion

74

Sport steering, variable 121

Stability control systems

119

Start/stop, automatic func‐ tion

67

Start/Stop button 65

Start function during malfunc‐ tion

35

Starting the engine

66

Status control display,

tires 101

Status information, iDrive

23

Status of Owner's Manual

7

Steering assistance 125

Steering wheel, adjusting

60

Steering wheel heating

60

Steptronic Sport transmis‐ sion, refer to Steptronic

transmission 72

Steptronic transmission

72

Stopping the engine

66

Storage compartment in the rear

165

Storage compartments 163

Storage compartments, loca‐ tions

163

Storage, tires

197

Storing the vehicle 229

Suitable engine oils

206

Summer tires, tread

195

Sun visor

158

Supplementary text mes‐

sage 81

Surround View

137

Switch for Dynamic Driv‐

ing 122

Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 153

Switch, refer to Cockpit

14

Symbols

6

Symbols in the status field 23

T

Tachometer

81

Tailgate, automatic

40

Tailgate, closing with no-

touch activation 43

Tailgate, emergency unlock‐

ing 42

Tailgate, hotel function

42

Tailgate, opening with no-

touch activation 43

Tailgate via remote con‐

trol 38

Tail lights

216

Technical changes, refer to

Safety

7

Technical data

232

Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment and Communication

Temperature, automatic cli‐

mate control 148

,

150

Temperature display for ex‐

ternal temperature 82

243


Seite 244


Temperature, engine oil

81

Tempomat, refer to Active

Cruise Control

126

Terminal, starting aid 223

Text message, supplemen‐ tary

81

Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 46

Thigh support 53

Tilt alarm sensor

47

Time of arrival 87

Tire damage 195

Tire identification marks

194

Tire inflation pressure

190

Tire inflation pressure moni‐

tor, refer to FTM 104

Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 100

Tires, changing 196

Tire sealant 197

Tires, everything on wheels and tires

190

Tires, run-flat tires 197

Tire tread

195

Tone, see user's manual for


Tool

210

Top View 140

Total vehicle weight 233

Touchpad

21

Tow fitting

224

Towing

224

Tow lug, see Tow fitting 224

Tow-starting

224

TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor

100

Traction control

120

TRACTION, driving dynam‐

ics 120

Transmission lock, electronic

unlocking 75

Transmission, Steptronic

transmission 72

Transporting children safely

61

Tread, tires 195

Trip computer

87

Triple turn signal activa‐

tion 69

Trip odometer 82

Turning circle

232

Turning circle lines, rearview

camera 138

Turn signals, operation 69

U

Unintentional alarm 47

Units of measure 90

Universal remote control 154

Unlock button, Steptronic transmission

73

Unlocking/locking via door

lock 39

Unlocking/locking with re‐

mote control 37

Unlocking, settings 45

Updates made after the edito‐ rial deadline

7

Upholstery care

228

USB interface

159

V

Vanity mirror 158

Variable sport steering

121

Vehicle battery

218

Vehicle battery, replac‐

ing 218

Vehicle, break-in 170

Vehicle care

227

Vehicle features and op‐

tions 6

Vehicle identification num‐ ber

9

Vehicle jack

218

Vehicle paint

227

Vehicle storage

229

Vehicle wash 226

Ventilation

152

Ventilation, refer to Parkedcar ventilation

153

VIN, see vehicle identification

number 9

Voice activation system

27

W

Warning and indicator lamps, see Check Control

78

Warning displays, see Check

Control 78

Warning messages, see

Check Control

78

Warning triangle 222

Warranty 7

Washer fluid

72

Washer nozzles, wind‐ shield

71

Washer system 70

Washing, vehicle 226

Water on roads

171

Weights

233

Welcome lamps during un‐ locking

37

Welcome lights 92

Wheel base, vehicle 232

Wheel cleaner

228

Wheels, changing

196

Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 190

Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 104

Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM

100

Width, vehicle

232

Window defroster, rear

148 ,

151

Windows, powered 47

Windshield washer fluid

72

Windshield washer noz‐ zles

71

Windshield washer sys‐ tem

70

Windshield wiper

70

Winter storage, care 229

244


Seite 245

Winter tires, suitable

tires 197

Winter tires, tread

195

Wiper

70

Wiper blades, replacing 210

Wiper fluid

72

Wiper, fold-out position

71

Wiper system 70

Wood, care 228

Word match concept, naviga‐

tion 25

Wrench, see Onboard vehicle

tool kit 210

X

xDrive

120

Xenon headlights, bulb re‐

placement 214



245

More about BMW bmwusa.com

The Ultimate

Driving Machine®

*BL296057400D*


BMW 3 SERIES GRAN TURISMO Owner's Manual

Assistant Bot

Contents

A-Z

THE BMW 3 SERIES

GRAN TURISMO.

OWNER'S MANUAL.

3 Series

Gran Turismo

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL

Contents

At a glance

Controls

Driving tips

Mobility

Reference

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

Updates made after the editorial deadline

User's manual for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication

Symbols

Symbols on vehicle components

Additional sources of information

BMW Driver’s Guide App

Vehicle features and options

Status of the Owner's

Manual

Basic information

Updates made after the editorial deadline

For your own safety

Warranty

Maintenance and repairs

Parts and accessories

California Proposition 65 Warning

Service and warranty

Maintenance

Data memory

Event Data Recorder EDR

Vehicle identification number

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

For Canadian customers

At a glance

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options

All around the steering wheel

All around the center console

All around the roofliner

iDrive

Vehicle features and options

The concept

Control Display

Hints

Switching on

Switch off

Control elements at a glance

Control elements

Controller with navigation system

Controller without navigation system

Buttons on controller

Buttons on controller

Selecting menu items

Operating concept

Opening the main menu

Menu items in the Owner's Manual

Changing between panels

Display of an opened menu

Opening the Options menu

Activating/deactivating the functions

Options menu

Changing settings

Touchpad

Selecting functions

Entering letters and numbers

Using interactive map and Internet

Changing settings

Example: setting the clock